JP2019000248A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of appropriately executing a performance.SOLUTION: In a slot machine 10, a sound performance by a speaker device 64 is executed by a sound generated by sound generation processing by each sound source IC. In this case, a first sound source IC generates a first sound of a length of a first period, a second sound source IC generates a second sound of a length of the first period of the same length as the first sound on a first sound source IC side, and then generates a third sound of a length of a second period. The second sound is set to a sound in which a player cannot identify an output sound. The first to third sounds are generated by the first sound source IC and the second sound source IC so that a series of sound performances are executed in which the third sound is identified subsequent to the first sound.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine or a slot machine is known. In these gaming machines, a configuration is known in which an internal lottery is performed based on the fact that a predetermined lottery condition is satisfied, and a privilege is given to a player according to the result of the internal lottery.

  Specifically, when the start lever is operated in the situation where a medal as a game medium is bet on the slot machine, the internal lottery is performed and the rotation of the reel is started and stopped while the reel is rotating. When the switch is operated, the reel stops rotating. If the reel stop result corresponds to the result of the internal lottery, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

  In this type of gaming machine, there is a case where a sound effect is performed by sound generation means such as a speaker as a kind of effect corresponding to the result of the internal lottery.

JP 2008-295707 A

  Here, in the gaming machines exemplified above, there is a demand for optimization of effects, and there is still room for improvement with respect to sound effects, for example.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably performing an effect.

The invention described in claim 1
A gaming machine comprising sound reproduction means capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on the predetermined sound information generated by the sound information generation means,
The sound information generating means
First sound information generating means for generating first sound information;
Second sound information generating means for generating second sound information having the same playback period as the first sound information and third sound information following the second sound information;
With
According to the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the second sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound,
A series of sounds can be reproduced by reproducing the sound based on the first sound information and reproducing the sound based on the third sound information by the sound reproducing means.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to perform an effect suitably.

It is a front view of the slot machine in one embodiment. It is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state where the front door is closed. It is a perspective view of the slot machine showing a state where the front door is opened. It is a rear view of a front door. It is a front view of a housing | casing. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement | sequence of each reel. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the symbol which can be visually recognized from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the symbol which can be visually recognized from a display window, and an effective line. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between a prize mode and the privilege provided. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a main controller. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process by a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by the main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for normal game states. It is a flowchart which shows a reel control process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning aspect established. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the stop control of a reel. It is a flowchart which shows RT state process. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 1st RT states. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning aspect established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for 2nd RT states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 3rd RT state lottery table. It is a flowchart which shows a bonus state process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the operation order of a stop button, and the winning aspect established. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for BB states. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition relationship of each state. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of display mode. It is a flowchart which shows a lottery result corresponding | compatible process. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st specific combination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 2nd specific combination process. It is a flowchart which shows a 3rd specific combination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for mode transfer alerting | reporting. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of a press order alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows a pushing order combination process. It is a flowchart which shows a winning result corresponding | compatible process. It is a flowchart which shows a game number management process. It is a flowchart which shows an end determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special zones. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation setting process by a sub control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows an effect setting process at the time of a bet. It is a flowchart which shows a start time effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for notification of a pushing order. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of an additional effect. It is a figure which shows an example of an alerting | reporting timing table. It is a flowchart which shows each stop operation time effect setting process. It is a figure which shows the relationship between alerting | reporting timing and an additional effect. It is a flowchart which shows all stop time effect setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for bonus alert | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows the process for specific role alerting | reporting. It is a flowchart which shows a continuous production | presentation setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a liquid crystal display device. It is a figure which shows an example of the display effect by a liquid crystal display device. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating an example of a continuous production. It is a flowchart which shows production data setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows a display data setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence of production | presentation content and production | presentation command, and display data. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process by a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a sound data setting process. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence of effect content and sound data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the relationship between sound data and sound source data. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the example of a set of output data. It is a flowchart which shows the sound production | generation process by the sound source IC. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating silence data from volume data and a relationship. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the frame update timing of a display effect, and sound data. In 2nd Embodiment, it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the correspondence of content of production and sound data. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between the frame update timing of a display effect, and sound data. In 3rd Embodiment, it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the difference with a game number management type | mold production and a time management type | mold production. It is a flowchart which shows a sound data setting process. In 4th Embodiment, it is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the generation | occurrence | production point of a specific sound in a special effect. It is a flowchart which shows the process for special effects by a main controller. It is a timing chart for demonstrating the relationship between a special effect and sound data.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, an embodiment in the case of application to a spinning cylinder type gaming machine, which is a kind of gaming machine, specifically, a slot machine will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. 1 is a front view of the slot machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 closed, FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 opened, and FIG. 5 is a rear view of the door 12, and FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 includes a housing 11 that forms an outer shell thereof. The casing 11 is formed in a box shape having an open front as a whole, and is attached by, for example, driving nails against a so-called island facility when installed in the game hall.

  A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a and 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 has a bearing portion 14a at a position corresponding to each support shaft 13a and 13b. , 14b are provided. When the support shafts 13a and 13b are inserted into the bearing portions 14a and 14b, the front door 12 rotates about an opening / closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a and 13b to the housing 11. The front door 12 can be opened and closed by rotating the front door 12 so as to be movable. Further, the front door 12 is brought into a locked state that cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on the back surface thereof. A key cylinder 21 that is integrated with the locking device 20 is provided on the upper right side of the front door 12, and is configured such that the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

  A game panel 25 for notifying the player of the game state is provided above the center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 is formed with three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and the inside of the slot machine 10 is visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into a single display window.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into upper and lower parts by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 includes a left reel 32L, a middle reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical shape (annular shape). Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is rotatably supported so that the central axis thereof is the rotation axis of the reel. The rotation axes of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are disposed on the same axis extending in the substantially horizontal direction, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R correspond to the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on a one-to-one basis. . Accordingly, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is visible through the corresponding display windows 26L, 26M, 26R. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotated forward, the surfaces of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are projected as if moving from top to bottom through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  Here, the configuration of the reel unit 31 will be briefly described.

  Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R can be individually rotated, that is, independently driven by the driving of each stepping motor. . For example, the stepping motor is set to rotate once by applying a drive signal of 504 pulses (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse), and the rotation position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotation position of the reel is determined by this excitation pulse. Be controlled. In the reel unit 31, a reel index sensor for detecting that the reel has made one rotation is installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has made one rotation, a detection signal is output to the main controller 101 described later each time the reel is detected. Therefore, main controller 101 determines the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output until the detection signal is input. It can be confirmed and corrected.

  On the outer peripheral surface of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a plurality of symbols as identification information are drawn in the long side direction (circumferential direction). More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, in order to switch the symbol at a predetermined position to the next symbol, it is necessary to output 24 pulses (= 504 pulses / 21 symbols) of excitation pulses. Further, the main control device 101 grasps the symbols visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input, or displays the display window. It is possible to perform control to stop a predetermined symbol at a position where it can be visually recognized from 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  Next, the symbols drawn on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R will be described.

  FIG. 6 shows a symbol arrangement of the left reel 32L, the middle reel 32M, and the right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Further, numbers from 0 to 20 are assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. These numbers are symbols that are visible to the main controller 101 from the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. Is a number for recognizing and not actually attached to the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. However, in the following description, the number is used for explanation.

  As a symbol, a “red bell” symbol (for example, the 20th of the left reel 32L), a “first replay” symbol (for example, the 19th of the left reel 32L), a “red 7” symbol (for example, 18 of the left reel 32L) ), “Watermelon” symbol (eg, 17th of left reel 32L), “white bell” symbol (eg, twelfth of left reel 32L), “second replay” symbol (eg, eleventh of left reel 32L) , “White 7” design (for example, 10th of left reel 32L), “Cherry” design (for example, 9th of left reel 32L), “BAR” design (for example, 5th of left reel 32L), “Youth” There are 10 types of symbols (for example, the 0th of the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement order of various symbols on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are completely different.

  Each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R is formed so that there are three symbols from which the entire symbol can be visually recognized out of the twenty-one symbols attached to the corresponding reel. Therefore, when all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R.

  In the slot machine 10, the game result of each game is notified using a combination of three symbols, one for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the symbols that can be viewed. Since 3 × 3 = 9 symbols are visible as described above, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are connected as combinations of these three symbols. The combination of symbols stopped on the upper line L1, the combination of symbols stopped on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R, and the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. There are combinations of symbols that stop at the lower line L3. Also, combinations of symbols that stop at the right-down line L4 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the lower symbol of the right reel 32R, the lower symbol of the left reel 32L, and the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M There are combinations of symbols that stop on the right rising line L5 connecting the symbols and the upper symbol of the right reel 32R. In addition, there are combinations of symbols that stop at the bent line L6 connecting the upper symbol of the left reel 32L, the middle symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the middle symbol of the right reel 32R. The lines L1 to L5 are lines that are straight when the symbols are arranged, and the bent line L6 is a line that is bent in the middle when the symbols are arranged. Note that there are combinations other than the bent line L6 as combinations of symbols that stop at the line where the bending occurs, but the description thereof is omitted here.

  Among these lines L1 to L6, a line that is activated and a line that is not activated are set according to the bet number of medals, and when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on the activated line, that is, the activated line As a winning establishment, a privilege for paying out a predetermined number of medals as game media is given, or a privilege for changing the gaming state is given. On the other hand, when the symbols are stopped in a predetermined combination on a line that is not activated, no winning is established and the above-mentioned privilege is not granted.

  In the present slot machine 10, only the right downward line L4 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8A, and the two lower lines L3 and the right downward line L4 as shown in FIG. 8B. There are a case where the combination line is an effective line and a case where only the bent line L6 is an effective line as shown in FIG. 8C. More specifically, when three medals are bet and the game is started, only the lower right line L4 is an effective line, and when two medals are bet and the game is started, The line L3 and the lower right line L4 are effective lines. When one game is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is an effective line. The three combined lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the right rising line L5 are not regarded as effective lines. In the following, a game started with 3 medals bet is a 3 bet game, a game started with 2 medals bet is a 2 bet game, and a game started with 1 medals bet Also called a one-bet game.

  9 to 11 are diagrams showing a correspondence relationship between a combination of symbols for winning and a privilege given when winning.

  As the small role winning in which medals are paid out, there are a first small role winning to a 32nd small role winning.

  When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “red bell” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line, 1st small role winning. When the first small role winning is achieved, nine medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  Although the combination of symbols for winning the second small role to 17th small role is different, in the 3-bet game, the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M The “red bell” design and the “red bell” design of the right reel 32R stop on the upper line L1, that is, the “bell” design of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the upper line L1. It is. For example, the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L stops at the upper level, the “cherry” symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle level, and the “second replay” symbol of the right reel 32R decreases to the lower level. If it stops, it becomes the fifth small role winning. As shown in FIG. 6, the “Cherry” symbol (No. 11 and No. 14) and the “Red Bell” symbol are arranged on the upstream adjacent positions (No. 12 and No. 15) on the middle reel 32M. On the right reel 32R, a “red bell” symbol is arranged at a position (No. 2, No. 5) separated by one symbol upstream of the “second replay” symbol (No. 0, No. 3). For this reason, when the fifth small role winning is established on the lower right line L4, the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the right The “red bell” symbol of the reel 32R stops on the upper line L1. When the second small part winning to the seventeenth small part winning are achieved, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 18th small role winning is a winning mode in which the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L stops at the upper stage or the lower stage. When the 18th small role winning is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The “red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “watermelon” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “red bell” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. In this case, it becomes a 19th small role winning prize. When the 19th small role winning is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  When the 20th small role winning to 24th small role winning is established in the 3-bet game, 3 medals are paid out, and 14 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  The 25th small role winning is a winning mode in which the “cherry” symbol of the left reel 32L stops at the upper or lower level, like the 18th small role winning. In the case of the 18th small role winning, the “red 7” symbol or the “white 7” symbol of the right reel 32R can stop at the middle stage only when the winning combination with BB is duplicated (“second replay” symbol, If the combination of “BAR” symbol and “BAR” symbol) is the 25th small role winning prize, the “Red 7” symbol or “White 7” symbol of the right reel 32R stops in the middle regardless of whether or not BB is won. Can do. When the 25th small role winning is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  If the “watermelon” symbol or “BAR” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “watermelon” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the active line, the 26th small role Winning a prize. When the 26th small role winning is achieved, 5 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 5 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  For example, when the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the “watermelon” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, for example, the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M or the left reel 32L. The “watermelon” symbol of the right reel 32R stops on the effective line, while the “watermelon” symbol of the remaining reels does not stop on the effective line, which is a so-called stoppage of the so-called watermelon tempering stoppage. When the 27th small role winning is established, 3 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  “Red bell” or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, “red 7” symbol, “BAR” symbol, “white bell” symbol, “cherry” symbol, “youth” symbol on the middle reel 32M, right When the “red bell” symbol on the reel 32R stops on the active line, a 28th small role winning is awarded. As shown in FIG. 6, the left reel 32 </ b> L has a “red bell” symbol (No. 3, No. 7, No. 15, No. 20) and a downstream adjacent position (No. 2, No. 6, No. 14, No. 19). ), The “first replay” symbol is arranged, and the “white bell” symbol (No. 12) and the “second replay” symbol are arranged at positions adjacent to the downstream side (No. 11). On the right reel 32R, the “red bell” symbol (No. 2, 5, 10, 15, 20) and the upstream adjacent position (No. 3, No. 6, No. 16, No. 0) The “1 replay” symbol or the “second replay” symbol is arranged. For this reason, when the 28th small winning combination is established on the lower right line L4, the “bell” is left on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R except when the “white bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M stops in the middle stage. While the symbol and the “replay” symbol are tempered, the “bell” symbol and the “replay” symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop. When the 28th small role winning is established, 9 medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  When the “watermelon” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line, the 29th small role prize is awarded. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch at the timing when the 9th “cherry” symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the upper or middle stage, The “white bell” symbol of the reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “red bell” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the middle line L2. When the 29th small role winning is achieved, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  When the “red bell” or “white bell” design of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” design of the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” design of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line, It becomes the 30th small role winning prize. Although details will be described later, the 30th small role winning is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. When the 30th small role winning is established, nine medals are paid out.

  When the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “BAR” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line, 31 small roles won. Although details will be described later, the 31st small role winning is a winning mode that is established only in the 3-bet game. When the 31st small role winning is achieved, nine medals are paid out.

  When the “watermelon” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “white 7” symbol or “cherry” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line, the 32nd small It becomes a role prize. When the 32nd small role winning is established, three medals are paid out in the 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in the 2-bet game.

  As a prize to be given a re-game privilege that allows a player to play the next game without inserting a medal, there are a first re-game prize to an eighth re-game prize. Further, when the second regame winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state, and when the third regame winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, and the fourth replaying is achieved. When a winning or fifth re-game winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. The first re-game win to the eighth re-game win are winning modes that are established only in the 3-bet game.

  State transition winnings in which only the game state transition is performed include a first BB winning, a second BB winning, and a CB winning.

  When the “red 7” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line, the first BB win is made, and the “white 7” symbol of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops on the active line When the “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “second replay” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the “white 7” symbol of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line, the second BB prize is awarded. . When these BB winnings are established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. When the “red bell” or “white bell” design of the left reel 32L, the “red bell” design of the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” design of the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line. , CB winning. When the CB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  In addition, although it is different from winning, there is a stop appearance in which the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Specifically, the “red bell” or “white bell” symbol of the left reel 32L, the “red 7” symbol, the “BAR” symbol, the “white bell” symbol, the “cherry” symbol of the middle reel 32M, and the right When the “watermelon” symbol on the reel 32R stops on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Also, the “red bell” or “white bell” design of the left reel 32L, the “white 7” design, the “watermelon” design, the “first replay” design of the middle reel 32M, and the “red 7” design of the right reel 32R. Even when the symbol, the “white 7” symbol, the “second replay” symbol, and the “cherry” symbol stop on the active line, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. Below, the combination of each said symbol is called a transition outcome.

  On the lower left side of the game panel 25, a start lever 41 that is operated to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is provided. The start lever 41 constitutes start operation means or start operation means operated to start rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, that is, to start variable display of symbols. When the start lever 41 is operated while a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate.

  On the right side of the start lever 41, button-like stop switches 42 to 44 that are operated to individually stop the rotating reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are provided. Each of the stop switches 42 to 44 is disposed immediately below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R corresponding to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

  Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a and a main control device 101 to be described later are connected. And main controller 101 grasps that operation of stop switches 42-44 was performed based on the detection signal from stop detection sensors 42a-44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, a detection signal of a LOW signal is output from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, The detection signal is switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal. The main control device 101 grasps the switching of the signals and grasps that the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. When it is determined that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the main control device 101 performs control so as to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the operated switch.

  That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the rotation of the left reel 32L is stopped. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the rotation of the middle reel 32M is stopped and the right stop switch 44 is operated. In this case, the rotation of the right reel 32R is stopped. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute stop operation means operated to stop the variable display of symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R.

  On the lower right side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, a medal insertion slot 45 for inserting medals is provided. The medal slot 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. If attention is paid to the point that the medal insertion slot 45 is directly inserted by the player, it can be said that it constitutes a direct input means for directly inputting the game medium.

  The medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as passage switching means provided on the back surface of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal path switching solenoid 46a. When the medal path switching solenoid 46a is not excited, the medal is guided to the discharge path 48, and when the medal path switching solenoid 46a is excited, the medal is switched. Is guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medal guided to the storage passage 47 is guided to the hopper device 51 housed inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medal guided to the discharge passage 48 is guided to the medal tray 50 from the medal discharge port 49 provided in the lower front portion of the front door 12 and returned to the player.

  The hopper device 51 includes a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to a player. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge the medal to the opening 48 a provided in the discharge passage 48 and to pay out the medal to the medal tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. It has become. Further, a reserve tank 54 is provided on the right side of the hopper device 51 to avoid storing a predetermined amount or more of medals in the storage tank 52. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a for discharging medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54 is provided. Therefore, when medals are stored more than the height at which the guide plate 52 a is provided, the medals are stored in the reserve tank 54.

  A button-like return switch 55 is provided below the medal slot 45. When the return switch 55 is operated in a situation where the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 45 is jammed in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically operated, and the medal jammed in the selector 46 is medaled. It is returned from the discharge port 49.

  On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R, there is provided a first credit insertion switch 56 for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the right side of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided on the left side of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. Each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 constitutes input means for inputting a game medium together with the medal insertion slot 45. It should be noted that the medal insertion slot 45 is accompanied by an operation of directly inserting a medal by the player, whereas each of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is only accompanied by an operation of inserting a virtual medal based on the storage memory. In other words, it can be said to constitute indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

  Between the first credit insertion switch 56 and the second credit insertion switch 57, an effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect occurs is provided. That is, a first credit insertion switch 56 and a third credit insertion switch 58 are provided on the left side of the effect switch 66, and a second credit insertion switch 57 is provided on the right side of the effect switch 66. Yes.

  A settlement switch 59 is provided on the left side of the start lever 41. In other words, the slot machine 10 has a credit function for storing and storing surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (for 50 medals) and payout medals at the time of winning as virtual medals. When the settlement switch 59 is operated under the stored and stored condition, the virtual medal is paid out from the medal discharge port 49 as an actual medal. In this case, if paying attention to the function of paying out the credited virtual medal as an actual medal, it can be said that the checkout switch 59 constitutes a checkout operation means for actually paying out the stored game media.

  Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25, a credit display unit 60 that displays the number of virtual medals credited, and a remaining payout number that displays the number of remaining medals to be paid out before the BB state ends. A display unit 61 and a payout number display unit 62 for displaying the number of medals paid out at the time of winning are provided. Although these display parts 60-62 are comprised by the 7 segment display, it is naturally possible to substitute by a liquid crystal display etc. FIG.

  Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25, and to the right of the payout number display section 62, a push order notification section 68 for notifying the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is provided. . The push order notification unit 68 includes three LED lamps corresponding to the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44, respectively. The push order notification unit 68 can be replaced by a liquid crystal display or the like, and an LED lamp is provided inside the stop switches 42 to 44 so that the stop switches 42 to 44 emit light, or the stop switch 42 It is good also as a structure which each provides LED lamp adjacent to -44.

  The upper part of the front door 12 has an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, and a pair of left and right sounds that produce various sound effects as the game progresses and inform the player of the gaming state. Speaker device 64 and a liquid crystal display device 65 as an auxiliary display unit for giving various information to the player. The liquid crystal display device 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and the game by the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be considered to be due to the main display unit. This is referred to as a liquid crystal display device 65. On the back surface of the liquid crystal display device 65, an upper lamp 63, a speaker device 64, a sub control device 81 for driving the liquid crystal display device 65, and a display control device 201 (not shown, see FIG. 12) are provided.

  A power supply box 70 is provided on the left side of the hopper device 51 inside the housing 11. The power supply box 70 accommodates a power supply device 91 therein, and includes a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is a start switch for supplying power to each unit including the main controller 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. Further, the setting key insertion hole 73 is used by a hole manager or the like to adjust the appearance of medals. That is, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when the error state is reset but also when the winning probability of the slot machine 10 is changed.

  Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that manages and manages games is attached to the housing 11.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described based on the block diagrams of FIGS. 12 and 13.

  The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centering on a CPU 102 which is an arithmetic processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave with a predetermined frequency, an input / output port 104, and the like are connected to the CPU 102 via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as a main board built in the slot machine 10.

  On the input side of the main controller 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects that each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation) and a start detection sensor that detects an operation of the start lever 41 are provided. 41a, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, a inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects a medal inserted from the medal slot 45, and a medal paid out from the hopper device 51. The payout detection sensor 51a, the first credit insertion detection sensor 56a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, the second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, and the third credit. The operation of the input switch 58 is detected individually. 3 credit insertion detection sensor 58 a, payment detection sensor 59 a that detects the operation of the payment switch 59, reset detection sensor 72 a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON Various sensors such as a setting key detection sensor 73 a for detecting the above are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input / output port 104.

  A power supply device 91 is connected to the input side of the main control device 101 via an input / output port 104. The power supply device 91 includes a power supply unit 91 a that supplies driving power to the electronic devices of the slot machine 10 including the main control device 101, a power failure monitoring circuit 91 b, and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power-off state and generates a power failure signal not only at the time of power failure but also when the power switch 71 powers off. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 VDC in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and determines that the power supply has been shut off when this drive voltage drops below, for example, 10 volts. Power outage signal is output. The power failure signal is supplied to each of the CPU 102 and the input / output port 104. The CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal and executes a power failure process described later. The power failure signal is also supplied to the sub-control device 81.

  The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts that is used as a drive voltage in a control system such as the main controller 101 even when the output voltage drops below 10 volts. As a time for outputting the stabilization voltage, a sufficient time for executing the power failure processing by the main control device 101 is secured.

  On the output side of the main controller 101, a reel unit 31 (more specifically, a stepping motor for rotating the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), a medal path switching solenoid 46a provided in the selector 46, a hopper device 51, a credit The input / output port 104 includes a display unit 60, a remaining payout number display unit 61, a payout number display unit 62, a push order notification unit 68, a sub-control device 81, an external concentration terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), Connected through.

  The CPU 102 described above includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 102 and fixed value data, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105. In addition to the RAM 106 for assuring, as is well known, various processing circuits necessary for the slot machine 10 such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission / reception circuit, a credit counter for counting the number of credits, etc. Various counters are built-in. The ROM 105 and the RAM 106 constitute a main memory as a storage unit, and a program for executing various processes is stored in the ROM 105 described above as a part of the control program.

  The RAM 106 is configured to retain (backup) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 has a memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing a lottery result of a combination, and stop information used when stop control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed. In addition to the stop information storage area 106b for storing the game information, the status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the BB status, etc., a backup area is provided.

  The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like (including power shutdown by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter). Yes, when the power failure is resolved (including power-on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before power-off based on the backup area information. . Writing to the backup area is executed when the power is shut off by a power failure process (see FIG. 14), and restoration of each value written to the backup area is executed in the main process when the power is turned on.

  Further, a power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 when the power is shut down due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When the power is shut off, an NMI interrupt process as a power failure flag generation process is immediately executed.

  As shown in FIG. 13, the sub-control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centering on a CPU 82 as arithmetic processing means. The CPU 82 includes a ROM 83 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 82 and fixed value data, and a work area that temporarily stores various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 83. A RAM 84 and the like for securing are incorporated.

  The sub-control device 81 is provided with an input / output port (not shown), the main control device 101 is connected to the input side, and the upper lamp 63, the speaker device 64, and the display control device 201 are connected to the output side. ing. The upper lamp 63, the speaker device 64, and the display control device 201 are driven and controlled based on various commands input from the main control device 101. That is, the sub-control device 81 is a sub-base that executes auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101 that is a main base that manages and manages the game. In other words, the sub-base is provided for voice, lamp, and display related to indirect games, thereby reducing the burden on the main base.

  The speaker device 64 includes a plurality of individual speakers 87a to 87w (first speaker 87a to 23rd speaker 87w). The individual speakers 87a to 87w are installed such that at least one of the installation position and the sound output direction is different. Here, an outline of a configuration in which sound (voice) is output from the plurality of individual speakers 87a to 87w will be described.

  The sub-control device 81 is provided with a sound source IC that controls the output of sound. In the present embodiment, the first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w are provided as the sound source ICs. A first amplifier 86a to a 23rd amplifier 86w and a first speaker 87a to a 23rd speaker 87w are connected to correspond to each of the sound source ICs 85a to 85w. In this embodiment, 23 channels are provided as sound output channels. Yes. When executing a sound effect by sound, the CPU 82 outputs sound data as sound information to be reproduced to the sound source ICs 85a to 85w. The sound source ICs 85a to 85w read the sound source data corresponding to the sound data from the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83, and reproduce the sound source data, thereby playing the sound from the individual speakers 87a to 87w via the corresponding amplifiers 86a to 86w. Is output. Processing related to output of sound data to the sound source ICs 85a to 85w, reading of sound data by the sound source ICs 85a to 85w, and output of sound from the individual speakers 87a to 87w will be described in detail later. In the following description, the sound source ICs 85a to 85w are collectively referred to as the sound source IC 85, the amplifiers 86a to 86w are collectively referred to as the amplifier 86, and the individual speakers 87a to 87w are collectively referred to as the individual speaker 87. The speaker device 64 including the sound source IC 85, the amplifier 86, and the individual speaker 87 constitutes sound generation means (sound reproduction means).

  An effect switch 66 (more specifically, an effect switch detection sensor that detects an operation of the effect switch 66) is connected to the input side of the sub-control device 81. Further, a first Vol switch 75 and a second Vol switch 76 are connected to the input side of the sub-control device 81 as switches for adjusting the volume of the sound from the individual speakers 87a to 87w. The first Vol switch 75 is a volume switch for game hall managers and the like, and is provided at a position where the front door 12 cannot be operated without opening the front door 12, such as the back of the sub-control device 81 (see FIG. The illustration by 3 etc. is omitted). On the other hand, the second Vol switch 76 is a volume switch for a player, and is provided at a position where it can be operated without opening the front door 12, such as an adjacent position of the effect switch 66 (FIG. 1). Etc. are omitted). The effect switch 66 may also be used for the second Vol switch 76. That is, the first Vol switch 75 is a volume switch that cannot be operated by the player and can be operated by the administrator of the game hall, and the second Vol switch 76 can be operated by the player and operated by the administrator of the game hall. It is a possible volume switch.

  The first Vol switch 75 can set the volume in a plurality of stages. For example, the volume can be set in 10 stages of a set volume 0 to a set volume 9. When the value of the set volume increases, the volume increases, the set volume 9 becomes the maximum volume, and in the case of the set volume 0 that becomes the minimum volume, the corresponding sound is not output even if the sound effect occurs.

  The second Vol switch 76 can also set the volume in a plurality of stages. For example, the volume can be set in 10 stages from the set volume 1 to the set 10. Similarly to the first Vol switch 75, the volume increases as the value of the set volume increases, and the set volume 10 becomes the maximum volume. On the other hand, unlike the first Vol switch 75, even when the set volume 1 is the minimum volume, when a sound effect is generated, a corresponding sound is output with a small amount.

  For example, when the set volume of the first Vol switch 75 is 0, no sound is output regardless of the set volume of the second Vol switch 76. Further, when the set volume of the first Vol switch 75 is one of the values 1 to 9, the output volume is determined by the value and the set volume of the second Vol switch 76. In this case, a range is determined for each of the set volumes 1 to 9 of the first Vol switch 75, and a range corresponding to the set volume on the first Vol switch 75 side by adjusting the set volume of the second Vol switch 76. The volume is determined within the range. It should be noted that the ranges determined for the set volumes 1 to 9 of the first Vol switch 75 may be determined so that overlapping areas occur between different setting volumes, or are determined so that overlapping areas do not occur. It may be done.

  The volume from each of the individual speakers 87a to 87w may be set individually for one or both of the first Vol switch 75 and the second Vol switch 76.

  The display control device 201 is provided with a CPU 202 which is an element in which a program ROM 203 and a work RAM 204 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 205, a character ROM 206, and a video RAM 207.

  The CPU 202 analyzes various commands received from the sub-control device 81 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 205 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 205).

  The program ROM 203 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the CPU 202 and fixed value data, and is a non-volatile storage means that does not require external power supply when holding the stored information. The work RAM 204 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when various programs are executed by the CPU 202, and a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold the stored information. It is.

  The VDP 205 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display unit driver incorporated in the liquid crystal display device 65. Since the VDP 205 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a “drawing chip”, and the substance of the VDP 205 can be said to be a microcomputer chip incorporating firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 205 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 202, the video RAM 207, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads out image data to be stored in the video RAM 207 from the character ROM 206 at a predetermined timing and causes the liquid crystal display device 65 to display the image data.

  The character ROM 206 serves as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65. The character ROM 206 holds bitmap format image data of various display patterns, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

  The video RAM 207 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65, and the display content of the liquid crystal display device 65 is changed based on rewriting the content of the video RAM 207.

  Next, each control process executed by the CPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101 will be described. The processing of the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in a cycle of 1.49 msec in the present embodiment), and a power failure signal to the NMI terminal. NMI interrupt processing that is activated in response to the input of. In the following, a process related to the progress of the game among these processes, that is, a timer interrupt process and a normal process performed in the main process will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 14 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing periodically executed by the main control apparatus 101. A timer interrupt is generated, for example, every 1.49 msec by the CPU 102 of the main control apparatus 101.

  First, in the register saving process shown in step S101, the values of all the registers in the CPU 102 used in the normal process described later are saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure flag is set. If the power failure flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, and a power failure process is executed.

  Here, an outline of the power failure process will be described.

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, a power failure signal is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power failure signal is input to the main controller 101 via the NMI terminal. When a power failure signal is input, main controller 101 immediately executes NMI interrupt processing and sets a power failure flag in the power failure flag storage area provided in RAM 106.

  In the power failure process, it is first determined whether or not the command transmission is completed. If the transmission is not completed, the present process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process to terminate the command transmission. If the command transmission has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is stored in the backup area of the RAM 106. Thereafter, the output state of the output port in the input / output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a RAM determination value for determining whether or not the data in the RAM 106 is normal when the power failure is eliminated is stored in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent RAM access. After performing the above processing, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the case where the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed. In consideration of, for example, the case where the power failure flag is set erroneously due to noise or the like, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure signal is output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered. Therefore, writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power outage signal is continuously output, the infinite loop is entered. Incidentally, it is confirmed whether or not a power failure signal is output even under an infinite loop, and when the power failure signal is not output, the main processing is performed.

  Returning to the description of the timer interrupt process, if the power failure flag is not set in step S102, various processes after step S104 are performed.

  That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clearing process for initializing the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of malfunction is performed. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed so that the next timer interrupt can be set for the CPU 102 itself. In step S106, in order to rotate each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, a stepping motor control process for driving a stepping motor that is a respective rotating drum driving motor is performed. In step S107, the states of various sensors (see FIG. 12) such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input / output port 104 are read, and whether or not the read result is normal. A sensor monitoring process for monitoring the above is performed. In step S108, timer calculation processing for subtracting the value of each counter or timer is performed. In step S109, a counter process for outputting the result of counting the number of medals bet and the number of payouts to the external concentration terminal board 121 is performed.

  In step S110, command output processing for transmitting various commands such as a lottery result command to be described later to the sub-control device 81 is performed. In step S111, a segment data setting process for setting segment data displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining payout number display unit 61, and the payout number display unit 62 is performed. In step S112, segment data display processing is performed in which the segment data set in the segment data setting processing is supplied to the display units 60 to 62 to display corresponding numbers, symbols, and the like. In step S113, port output processing for outputting data corresponding to the I / O device from the input / output port 104 is performed. In step S114, the value of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 is returned to the corresponding register in the CPU 102, respectively. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

  Next, normal processing for performing main control related to the game will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process for permitting the next timer interrupt is performed. In step S202, pre-start processing for enabling a game is performed. In the pre-start process, the process waits until the sub-control device 81 and the like finish initialization. When the initialization of the sub-control device 81 and the like is completed, the game management process shown in steps S203 to S215 is performed.

  As a game management process, in step S203, data such as various game information stored in the RAM 106 (for example, a random value used in the previous game) is cleared. Thereafter, in step S204, start waiting processing is performed.

  In the start waiting process, it is determined whether or not any re-game winning is established in the previous game. If any of the re-game winnings has been established, an automatic insertion process for automatically inserting the same number of virtual medals as the previous bet number is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, when a re-game prize is established in a 3-bet game, a process of automatically inserting three virtual medals is performed. When a re-game prize is established in a one-bet game, one virtual medal is obtained. A process for automatically inserting medals is performed. By the way, in this embodiment, the re-game winning is not established in the 2-bet game, but if it is modified so that the re-game winning is also established in the 2-bet game, two cards are obtained in this automatic insertion process. It is recommended to set the virtual medal to be automatically inserted.

  In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. That is, if any re-game winning is established in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals owned and without inserting medals. If none of the re-game winnings have been established, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to confirm whether an abnormality has occurred in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interruption process, If an abnormality has occurred, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of the error is performed. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether or not the settlement switch 59 has been operated. I do.

  After completion of the medal return process or when the settlement switch 59 is not operated, whether or not the medal insertion or the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 are operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process If either one is performed, a medal insertion process for changing the number of bets or the like is performed, and the start waiting process is terminated. If neither medal insertion nor operation of the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 is performed between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process is ended as it is.

  After completion of the start waiting process, it is determined in step S205 whether or not the bet number of medals has reached a specified number. In the slot machine 10, “2” is set as the specified number in the CB state, and a gaming state other than the CB state (specifically, a normal gaming state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, BB) “1” and “3” are set as the prescribed numbers in the state). That is, in the CB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the bet number is “2”, and on the condition other than the CB state, the bet number is “1” or “3”. In step S205, an affirmative determination is made. In other words, in a gaming state other than the CB state, if no medal is bet or if the bet number is “2” even if the bet is bet, a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of bets has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process in step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed.

  If the bet number has reached the specified number, the mode transition notification process is executed in step S206. The transition notification process will be described in detail later.

  After performing the process of step S206, the bet command including the information of the process result of step S206 and the information of the bet number determined to be affirmative in step S205 is sent to the sub-control device 81 as the sub-side control device. Set as output target. The command set here is output to the sub-control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The processing of the sub control device 81 that has received the bet command will be described in detail later.

  After performing the process of step S207, it is determined whether the start lever 41 was operated in step S208. When the start lever 41 is not operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the processes after the sensor abnormality confirmation process are performed among the processes.

  On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated in a situation where a prescribed number of medals are betted. Means that a command has occurred. In such a case, an effective line setting process for setting a combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line is performed in step S209. That is, in the 3-bet game, only the lower right line L4 is set as an effective line, and in the 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are set as active lines. In the 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as an active line. In step S210, the medal path switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. Thereafter, the lottery process in step S211, the reel control process in step S212, the medal payout process in step S213, the RT state process in step S214, and the bonus state process in step S215 are executed in order, and the process returns to step S203.

  Next, the lottery process in step S211 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S301, a random number used when determining whether or not the combination is correct is acquired. In the slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuit latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers from 0 to 65535, and after confirming the operation of the start lever 41, the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuit in the RAM 106. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to quickly acquire a random number at the timing when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid occurrence of problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuit of the slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

  After acquiring the random number, in step S302, a lottery table for determining whether or not the winning combination is selected is selected. The slot machine 10 is roughly divided into six game states: a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state.

  That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the bet number and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the bet number and the gaming state is selected. . For example, if the bet number is “3” and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and the lottery table for the normal gaming state is displayed. select. Further, in this slot machine 10, a six-stage winning probability from “Setting 1” to “Setting 6” is prepared in advance, and a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole to perform an ON operation and a predetermined operation is performed. Thus, it is possible to set which winning probability is to execute the internal processing. In step S302, the lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected when the setting state is “setting 1”, and the lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected when it is “setting 6”.

  The lottery table will be briefly described. FIG. 17 is a normal game state lottery table selected in the normal game state of “setting 3”. An index value IV is set in the lottery table, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and a point value PV.

  After selecting the lottery table, the index value IV is set to 1 in step S303, and a determination value DV used for determining whether or not the winning combination is determined is set in subsequent step S304. In the determination value setting process, a new determination value DV is set by adding a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV to the current determination value DV. In the initial determination value setting process, the random value acquired in step S301 is set as the current determination value DV, and a new point value PV corresponding to 1 as the current index value IV is added to the random value. The determination value is DV.

  Thereafter, in step S305, it is determined whether or not the combination corresponding to the index value IV is correct. In the combination determination, it is determined whether or not the determination value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, the process proceeds to step S306, and the winning flag corresponding to the index value IV at that time is set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106. For example, if the determination value DV exceeds 65535 when IV = 20, in step S306, a winning flag indicating that the first small role to the fifth small role and the 14th small role to the 17th small role are won. Set in the winning flag storage area 106a.

  By the way, a winning flag indicating that the set winning flag has won the first BB (hereinafter referred to as “first BB winning flag”) or a winning flag indicating that the second BB has been won (hereinafter referred to as “second BB winning flag”). Otherwise, the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding winning flag is set (see S203 of the normal process). On the other hand, when the winning flag is the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag, these winning flags are reset as one of the conditions that the corresponding winning is established. In other words, the first BB winning flag and the second BB winning flag may be valid over a plurality of games. In step S306 in the state where the first BB winning flag or the second BB winning flag is carried over, if the winning combination other than the first BB, second BB, and CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and the first BB, second BB, If the winning combination other than CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

  If the determination value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the combination corresponding to the index value IV is lost. In such a case, 1 is added to the index value IV in step S307, and in the subsequent step S308, it is determined whether or not there is a combination corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a determination target to be determined. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV added by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index values IV set in the lottery table. If there is a determination target to be determined whether or not, the process returns to step S304 and the determination of whether or not the winning combination is continued. At this time, in step S304, a point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the determination value DV (that is, the current determination value DV) used for determining whether or not the previous winning combination is a new determination value DV. In step S305, whether or not a winning combination is made is determined based on the determination value DV. By the way, when the winning / failing determination of the combination is performed using the lottery table shown in FIG. 17, the probability of winning in the normal replay (the probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 / 7.3, strong cherry The probability of winning in the case of IV = 13 (probability of winning in the case of IV = 13) is about 1/263, the probability of winning in weak cherry (probability of winning in the case of IV = 14) is about 1/183 is there. The probability of winning a watermelon (the probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1/154, the probability of winning a chance A (the probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1/252 The probability of winning in chance B (the probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1/252. The probability of winning the middle bell (the probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 1/32800, the probability of winning the unquestioned bell (the probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 65500 minutes 1. Forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch bell 1, pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 20-23) is about 1/164, medium push bell 1, The probability of winning the middle pressed bell 2, the right pressed bell 1, and the right pressed bell 2 (the probability of winning when IV = 24 to 27) is about 16.4. The probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 1 (probability of winning when IV = 31) is about 1770, the probability of winning the strong cherry duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 32) is The probability of winning about 1/6803, weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 33) is about 1/280, the probability of winning weak cherry overlap 2 (when IV = 34) The probability of winning is about 6550. The probability of winning for watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is about 1/280, and the probability of winning for watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 6550. A fraction. The chances of winning chance A overlap 1, chance A overlap 2, chance B overlap 1, chance B overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37-40) are about 1/280, respectively. The probability of winning the middle bell duplication 1 and the middle bell duplication 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41, 42) is about 1/2620. The probability of winning the first BB and the second BB independently (probability of winning when IV = 43, 44) is about 1/65500. The probability of winning CB (the probability of winning when IV = 45) is about 19.9. In addition, the probability of losing no winning combination is about 1.94.

  In the normal gaming state lottery table, 0 is set for the point values PV of IV = 2 to 12, 28 to 30, and 46 to 49. For this reason, in the normal gaming state, these index values IV are not won.

  After the winning flag is set in step S306, or when it is determined in step S308 that there is no determination target to be determined, it means that the winning combination determination has ended. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S309, and a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a predetermined period.

  In subsequent step S310, a lottery result handling process is performed. In the lottery result handling process, a process for determining whether or not to shift the game state according to the lottery results in steps S301 to S309, a process for notifying the pressing order, and the like are performed. The lottery result handling process will be described later in detail.

  After executing the process of step S310, a lottery result command is set in step S311. Here, the lottery result command is a command that is transmitted to the sub-control device 81 in order to grasp the result of the combination determination. However, in the normal process, various commands such as the lottery result command are only set in the ring buffer, and no command is transmitted to the sub-control device 81. The command transmission to the sub-control device 81 is performed in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

  In step S312, a stop information setting process for setting stop information for reel stop control is performed, and the lottery process is terminated. In the stop information setting process, stop information is set in the following order of priority when a plurality of roles are selected among the small roles, replays, and bonuses. Stop information is set so that a bonus winning is established when a small winning combination cannot be established, so that a small winning combination is preferentially established when a small winning combination and a bonus are won. When replay and bonus are won, stop information is set so that the replay win is established with priority.

  Next, the reel control processing in step S212 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In the reel control process, first, a rotation effect process is performed in step S401. The rotation effect process is a process for performing an effect using the reel control during the invalid period based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S309. In step S402, a rotation start process for starting the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is performed.

  In the rotation start process, it is checked whether or not a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reel started to rotate in the previous game. Wait until When the wait time has elapsed, a wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process for setting rotation start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106 is performed. By performing such processing, stepping motor acceleration processing is started in the stepping motor control processing (step S106) of the timer interrupt processing, and the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R start to rotate. For this reason, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not immediately start rotating.

  In step S403, the process waits until the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate at a constant rotation speed at a predetermined rotation speed, and determines whether or not an invalid period has elapsed since the start of rotation. If the invalid period has not elapsed, the process waits in step S403. When the rotation speed of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R becomes a constant speed and the invalid period has elapsed, it is possible to generate a stop command by lighting up a lamp (not shown) of each of the stop switches 42 to 44. In addition to notifying the player or the like, the process proceeds to step S404 to perform a valid flag setting process. The valid flag setting process is a process for setting the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 that are valid when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. This setting process will be described in detail later.

  After performing the valid flag setting process, it is determined in step S405 whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. When none of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated, the process waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S406 to determine whether or not the stop switch corresponding to the rotating reel has been operated, that is, whether or not a stop command has been issued. To do. If no stop command has been issued, the process returns to step S405 and waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 is operated.

  If a stop command is generated, stop command response processing is executed in step S407. In the stop command response process, a process for stopping the rotation of the reel corresponding to the reel for which the stop command has been issued is performed. Such a handling process will be described in detail later. In the handling process, the arrival symbol that has reached the reference position (lower stage in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated, and the stop information storage area 106b Based on the stored stop information, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated, and when the symbol corresponding to the calculated number of slips reaches the reference position, the rotation of the reels is stopped. In this case, in the slot machine 10, as a stop mode for stopping the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, a stop mode for stopping the reaching symbol reaching the base point position as it is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. And a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode for stopping after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode for stopping after sliding for three symbols, and a slip for four symbols There are prepared five patterns of stop modes including a stop mode to be stopped after that, and the reel stop control is performed in any one of these stop modes.

  Thereafter, in step S408, it is determined whether or not all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped. If all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are not stopped, stop information second setting processing is performed in step S409, and the process returns to step S405.

  Here, the stop information second setting process is a process of changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels are stopped. In the stop information second setting process, the stop information is changed based on the set winning flag and the stop appearance of the stopped reel. In the present slot machine 10, for example, when IV = 20 to 27, the winning push bell 1, the forward pushing bell 2, the pinching bell 1, the pinching bell 2, the middle bell 1, the middle bell 2, right When the push bell 1 and right push bell 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “push order bell”) are won (see FIG. 17), the stop switches 42 to 44 that have generated stop commands are selected. A stop information second setting process is performed to change the winning mode established according to the operation order.

  FIG. 19 is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 and the winning mode established. For example, when the middle push bell 1 is won, stop information is set so that the second small role winning or the fifth small winning combination is established when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, and the middle stop switch 43 is set. Stop information is set so that the first small role winning is established when the first is operated, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the second small winning or the fifth small winning is established. Set stop information. However, even if stop information is set in this way, a corresponding winning may not be established depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  The symbol arrangement of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In the slot machine 10, in a gaming state (3-bet game) other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be stopped after sliding up to four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated. Only the lower right line L4 is set as an effective line. For this reason, when the same symbols are arranged on the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R at intervals of 4 symbols or less, the winning symbol is effective when the winning symbol is obtained regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch 43. Can be stopped on line. On the other hand, with respect to the symbols arranged so that a section separated by 5 symbols or more is formed, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 aiming at the symbols when stopping on the active line.

  An example will be described in which the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42, the middle stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order. In such a case, stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed to establish the second small winning combination or the fifth small winning combination.

  The second small role symbols on the left reel 32L are the “red bell” symbol and the “white bell” symbol. Further, the “red bell” symbol and the “white bell” symbol also have a function as a fifth small role symbol. The left reel 32L is arranged such that the interval between the second small symbols (fifth small symbols) is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the “red bell” symbol or the “white bell” symbol stops at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing. For example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the 8th “watermelon” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. 20 (a), the 12th “white bell” The symbol stops at the top. As a result, there remains room for winning the second small winning combination or the fifth small winning combination on the lower right line L4.

  The second small role symbol of the middle reel 32M is the “red 7” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the “red 7” symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. The fifth small role symbol of the middle reel 32M is a “cherry” symbol. On the middle reel 32M, “cherry” symbols are arranged at positions 11 and 14. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small role symbol or the fifth small role symbol stops on the effective line, or both the second small role symbol and the fifth small role symbol are on the effective line. It does not stop.

  Specifically, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated at a timing when any of the “white bell” symbol No. 6 to the “first replay” symbol No. 13 reaches the lower stage, the fifth small role symbol The “Cherry” symbol stops at the middle. As a result, there remains room for the fifth small role winning on the right-down line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at a timing when any one of the 14th “cherry” design to the 17th “first replay” design reaches the lower stage, as shown in FIG. The “Red 7” symbol, which is the 2 small role symbol, stops in the middle. As a result, there remains room for the second small role winning on the right-down line L4. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at another timing, even if the middle reel 32M is slid by 4 symbols and then stopped, the second small role symbol and the fifth small role symbol can be stopped in the middle stage. Can not. When the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such timing, the second “BAR” symbol or the sixth “white bell” symbol stops in the middle.

  When the second small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the second small role winning can be established.

  The second small role symbol of the right reel 32R is the “red 7” symbol. On the right reel 32R, the “red 7” symbol is arranged only at the 18th position. For this reason, the second small role symbol may or may not stop on the active line depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at a timing when any one of the 14th “watermelon” symbol to the 18th “red 7” symbol reaches the lower stage, it is shown in FIG. As such, the “red 7” symbol, which is the second small role symbol, stops at the lower stage. As a result, the second small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower stage. For example, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the No. 13 “Cherry” symbol reaches the lower level, as shown in FIG. 20D, the No. 14 “Watermelon” symbol appears on the lower level. Stop. From the left, the combination of the “white bell” symbol, “red 7” symbol, and “watermelon” symbol is a transitional outcome as shown in FIG.

  When the fifth small role symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, the stop information is changed in the stop information second setting process so that the fifth small role winning can be established.

  The fifth small role symbol of the right reel 32R is the “second replay” symbol. On the right reel 32R, the “second replay” symbols are arranged at the 0th and 3rd positions. For this reason, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the fifth small role symbol stops or does not stop on the active line. Specifically, when the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the 17th “BAR” symbol to the 3rd “second replay” symbol reaches the lower stage, the 5th small role symbol is obtained. The “second replay” symbol stops at the bottom. As a result, the fifth small winning combination is established on the right-down line L4. When the right stop switch 44 is operated at another timing, the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower stage. From the left, the combination of the “white bell” symbol, “cherry” symbol, and “watermelon” symbol is a transitional outcome as shown in FIG.

  When the second small role symbol and the fifth small role symbol of the middle reel 32M do not stop at the middle stage, that is, when the “BAR” symbol or the “white bell” symbol of the middle reel 32M stops at the middle stage, stop information second In the setting process, the stop information is changed so that the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower stage.

  The “watermelon” symbols are arranged on the right reel 32R so that the interval between the “watermelon” symbols is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the “watermelon” symbol stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing. FIG. 11 shows a combination of “white bell”, “BAR”, and “watermelon” symbols from the left, and a combination of “white bell”, “white bell”, and “watermelon” symbols from the left. It is a transitional turn.

  As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → the middle stop switch 43 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small winning combination is achieved, This is either a case where a winning is achieved or a case where the transition outcome is stopped.

  Next, a case where the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 is operated in this order will be described as an example. In such a case, stop control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is performed in order to establish the first small winning combination.

  On the middle reel 32M, the “red bell” symbols as the first small role symbols are arranged such that the interval between the “red bell” symbols is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the “red bell” symbol stops in the middle stage regardless of the operation timing.

  On the left reel 32L, a “red bell” symbol and a “white bell” symbol, which are the first small role symbols, are arranged such that the interval between the first small role symbols is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when the left stop switch 42 is operated for the second time, the “red bell” symbol or the “white bell” symbol stops at the upper stage regardless of the operation timing.

  On the right reel 32R, the “red bell” symbol as the first small role symbol is arranged such that the interval between the “red bell” symbols is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the “red bell” symbol stops at the lower stage regardless of the operation timing.

  As described above, when the middle push bell 1 is won and the middle stop switch 43 → the left stop switch 42 → the right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the first small winning combination is established regardless of the operation timing.

  If the push order bell is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in one or two predetermined operation sequences, the first small role winning is established regardless of the operation timing. When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in another operation order, a small winning combination is established or the transition outcome is stopped on the active line depending on the operation timing. By the way, when winning the middle bell, the 29th small role winning is established regardless of the operation order and operation timing, and when winning the unquestionable bell, the operation is performed regardless of the operation order and operation timing. One small role winning is established.

  Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S408 that all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S410. The payout determination process is a process of setting the payout number of medals as one of the conditions that the combination of winning symbols is arranged on the active line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on the active line is derived from the symbol number of the stopped symbol stopped at the lower stage of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning is achieved on the effective line. judge. If a winning is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination is associated with the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning winning combination and the number of payouts corresponding to the winning winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, an abnormality occurrence process for notifying the occurrence of an error is performed while the slot machine 10 is set in an error state. Such an error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

  After performing the payout determination process, a winning result handling process is performed in step S411. In the winning result handling process, a process of shifting the gaming state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result handling process will be described later in detail.

  After the winning result handling process is performed, in step S412, a winning result command is set so that the sub-control device 81 can recognize the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

  Next, the outline of the medal payout process in step S213 will be described.

  In the medal payout process, it is determined whether or not the payout number set in the payout information storage area is zero. If the number of payouts is 0, it means that it has been determined in the previous payout determination process that a small winning combination has not been established. In this case, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process, it is determined whether or not any of the first re-game winning to the eighth re-game winning is achieved. If none of the re-game winnings have been established, the medal payout process is terminated, and if any of the re-game winnings have been established, a re-game setting process is performed for changing the gaming state to the re-gaming state. Then, the medal payout process is terminated. In the start waiting process described above (step S204), the automatic insertion process is performed when it is determined that the current gaming state is the re-gaming state.

  On the other hand, if the number of payouts set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals are paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, regarding the payout of medals, when the count value of the credit counter has not reached the upper limit (the number of stored medals is 50), the payout number is added to the count value of the credit counter and the value after the addition is added. It is displayed on the credit display unit 60. In addition, when the count value of the credit counter reaches the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven and the medal is discharged from the hopper device 51. It pays out to the medal tray 50 through the exit 49. In the medal payout process, a process of changing the payout number displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout is also performed. When the current gaming state is the BB state, the payout number is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter, which will be described later, and the remaining payout number displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted. .

  Next, the RT state process in step S214 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S501, it is determined whether or not the transition outcome has stopped on the active line. If the transition is stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, and it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. Thereafter, this process is terminated. If it is determined in step S501 that the transition outcome is not stopped on the active line, the process proceeds to step S504, and the second re-game winning is determined based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. It is determined whether or not it is established. When the second re-game winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. Thereafter, this process is terminated. In addition, when the game is stopped on the active line in a gaming state other than the normal gaming state, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and in step S503. Then, the first RT setting flag is set, and this process is terminated.

  If the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state. In step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the first RT state based on the setting of the first RT setting flag in the state information storage area 106c, and the first RT state lottery table is selected. To do.

  FIG. 22 is a first RT state lottery table selected in the first RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the normal gaming state lottery table (see FIG. 17), the first RT state lottery table is different in the point values PV of IV = 1 to 5, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. For this reason, when a winning / failing determination is made using such a lottery table, the probability of winning in the case of IV = 6 to 49 is equal to the winning probability in the normal gaming state, and winning in the case of IV = 1. The probability of winning will be about 17.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2-5 will be about 12.8. The probability of losing none of the roles is about 1.94.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if the winning is made when IV = 1, the normal replay is won, and if the winning is made when IV = 2, the first promoted replay 1 is won. If it is elected at the time of = 3, it will be elected to the first promotion replay 2; if it is elected at the time of IV = 4, it will be elected to the first promotion replay 3; If this happens, the first promotion replay 4 will be won. The probability of winning in any of IV = 1 to 5 is about 7.30. The normal replay winning probability under the normal gaming state is also approximately 1 / 7.30. In other words, when the gaming state transitions to the first RT state, a winning mode in which each of the small role, replaying, and bonus types is won with the same probability as the normal gaming state, while a replaying privilege is given. Changes to something different from the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, only the first re-game prize that does not shift the gaming state is established, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first re-game prize, there is a third re-game prize that shifts to the second RT state. To establish.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), a stop command is issued not only when the above-mentioned push order bell is won but also when the first promoted replay 1 to the first promoted replay 4 are won. Stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established according to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  FIG. 23A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won, unlike the case where the push order bell is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first replay prize or The third replay prize will be established. In the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the third regame is associated with one of the six operation sequences, and the first regame corresponds to the other operation sequences. It is attached.

  In the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, the seventh replay, and the eighth replay are also assigned as the winning combination. However, none of the six operation sequences is associated with the sixth to eighth games. Therefore, even if the 6th replay to the 8th regame are elected to the first promotion replays 2 to 4, no winning is made regardless of the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  More specifically, in the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned to the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 2 is assigned to the first replay and the first replay. In addition to the 3 replays, the 6th replay is assigned, and in the 1st promotion replay 3, the 7th regame is assigned in addition to the 1st replay and the 3rd replay, and the 1st promotion replay 4 is Although the 8th regame is assigned in addition to the 1st regame and the 3rd regame, the replay to win in any of the 1st promotion replays 1 to 4 is the 1st regame and the 3rd regame. It is one of the games. This is to make it difficult to understand the order of operations in which the third replay prize is established. That is, for example, if there is only one type of first promotion replay, the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning will also be one type, and the third replay winning will be intentionally established when the first promotion replay is won. This can be possible. Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other duplicate roles.

  Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S504 that the second re-game winning is not established, the process proceeds to step S506, on the basis of the winning winning combination set in the previous payout determining process, It is determined whether or not a third replay prize has been established. When the third replay winning is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and this process is terminated. To do.

  If the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state. In step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the second RT state based on the second RT setting flag being set in the state information storage area 106c, and the second RT state lottery table is selected. To do.

  FIG. 24 is a second RT state lottery table selected in the second RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the first RT state lottery table (see FIG. 22), the second RT state lottery table is different in the point values PV of IV = 1 to 10, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. For this reason, if the winning / failing determination is made using such a lottery table, the probability of winning in the case of IV = 11 to 49 is equal to the winning probability in the first RT state, and the winning in the case of IV = 1. The probability of being won is about 13.2 and not winning when IV = 2-5, and the probability of winning when IV = 6-8 is about 10.5, IV = 9, respectively. , 10, the probability of winning is about 1/00. The probability of losing no winning combination is about 1/150. That is, when transitioning to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal gaming state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first re-game prize that does not shift the gaming state, the second re-game prize that shifts to the first RT state, the fourth re-game prize that shifts to the third RT state, and the fifth re-game prize Winning is established.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), in addition to the case where the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 described above are won, the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the first Even when the 2 promotion replay 2 is won, stop information is set so as to change the winning mode established by the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that have generated the stop command.

  FIG. 23B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first regame prize or the second regame prize is always established. When the second promotion replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first regame prize, the fourth regame prize, and the fifth regame prize is surely established. . When the second promotion replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first regame prize or the fourth regame prize is always established.

  In addition, the number attached | subjected to the 4th regame in a figure respond | corresponds with the symbol combination at the time of the 4th regame winning a prize being established. “1” corresponds to a symbol combination that becomes a disjointed pattern, “2” corresponds to a symbol combination that stops 7 different colors in the middle stage, and “3” corresponds to a symbol combination that stops red 7, red 7, and BAR in the middle stage. Corresponding to the combination, “4” corresponds to the symbol combination that is white 7, white 7, and BAR middle stage stop (see FIG. 11). For example, when the left stop switch 42 is first operated when the second promotion replay 1 is won, the broken symbol combination stops and the fourth re-game winning is established, or a different color 7 The symbol combination that stops the middle of the symbol is stopped and the fourth re-game winning is established.

  Returning to the description of the RT state process, if it is determined in step S506 that the third regame winning is not established, the process proceeds to step S509, and based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process, It is determined whether the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is established. If the fourth regame prize and the fifth regame prize are not established, the present process is terminated as it is. If the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is established, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511. Then, this process ends.

  If the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state. In step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the third RT state based on the setting of the third RT setting flag in the state information storage area 106c, and the third RT state lottery table is selected. To do.

  FIG. 25 is a third RT state lottery table selected in the third RT state of “setting 3”. When compared with the second RT state lottery table (see FIG. 24), the third RT state lottery table is different in the point values PV of IV = 9 to 12, and the same point value PV as the other index values IV. Is set. For this reason, when determining whether or not a winning combination is made using such a lottery table, the probability of winning in the case of IV = 1 to 8, 13 to 49 is equal to each winning probability in the second RT state, and IV = 9, 10 In the case of IV = 11, 12, the probability of winning is about 1 / 7.0. The probability of losing no winning combination is about 1/150. In other words, when the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the winning mode is such that each of the small role, replaying, and bonus types is won with the same probability as the second RT state, and a regaming privilege is given. Changes to something different from the second RT state. More specifically, in the third RT state, in addition to the first re-game prize that does not shift the gaming state and the second re-game prize that shifts to the first RT state, the sixth re-game prize that does not shift the gaming state, A 7 re-game prize, an 8th re-game prize, and a third re-game prize that shifts to the second RT state are established.

  In the stop information second setting process (step S409), even when the BAR replay 1 and the BAR replay 2 are won, the winning mode is changed according to the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command. Set stop information as much as possible.

  FIG. 23C is an explanatory diagram illustrating a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. When BAR Replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first re-game prize, the sixth re-game prize, the seventh re-game prize, and the third re-game prize Is always true. When BAR Replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, any one of the first re-game prize, the sixth re-game prize, the eighth re-game prize, and the third re-game prize Is always true.

  Next, the bonus state process of step S215 will be described based on the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state, that is, whether or not the current gaming state is a BB state or a CB state. If not in the bonus state, bonus determination processing shown in steps S602 to S614 is performed.

  In the bonus determination process, it is determined in step S602 whether any of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set. If any of the winning flags is set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether or not a CB winning has been established based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB winning is established, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S604. In step S605, 15 is set in the remaining payout counter for counting the number of remaining medals that can be paid out in the bonus state provided in the state information storage area 106c. By performing the processing of steps S604 to S605, the gaming state shifts to the CB state.

  Here, the CB and the CB state will be briefly described.

  If the “red bell” symbol or “white bell” symbol on the left reel 32L, the “red bell” symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the “watermelon” symbol on the right reel 32R are stopped on the active line, the CB Winning a prize. The CB symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R so that the interval between the CB symbols is 4 symbols or less. For this reason, when CB is won, CB winning is established regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

  The main control device 101 determines that the gaming state is the CB state when the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. In step S205 of the normal process, it is determined whether or not the bet number of medals has reached “2” instead of “3”. In the effective line setting process (step S207), the lower line L3 and the lower right line L4 are determined. Is set as the active line.

  In step S302 of the lottery process, a CB state lottery table is selected. Although the illustration of the CB state lottery table is omitted, in the CB state lottery table, “0” is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 45, and “16384” is set as the point value of IV = 46 to 49. Is set (see FIG. 17 etc. for the correspondence between IV and winning combination). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning the CB small role 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 46) is about 4.00, and the probability of winning the CB small role 2 (IV = 47). (Probability of winning at the time of winning) is about 4.00, the probability of winning CB SME 3 (the probability of winning when IV = 48) is about 4.00, and CB The probability of winning the small role 4 (the probability of winning when IV = 49) is about 4.00. No deviating event occurs.

  FIG. 27A is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, no matter which CB medium role 1 to CB medium role 4 is won, regardless of the operation order and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, some small role winning It must be true. Since the CB state is a two-bet game, when the first small role winning, the 18th small role winning, the 19th small role winning, and the 25th small role winning are achieved, 15 medals are paid out, In the case where the 2nd small role prize to the 17th small role prize and the 20th small role prize to the 24th small role prize are established, 14 medals are paid out. That is, when the CB state is entered, 14 or 15 medal payouts are always made.

  In addition, in place of or in addition to the CB as the winning combination and the CB state as the gaming state, a single bonus (SB) that enables execution of one game (JAC game) as the winning combination, and the single bonus winning (winning) SB state that shifts based on The CB and CB states may be referred to as MB and MB state.

  Returning to the description of the bonus state process, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB winning is not established, it means that a bonus winning flag other than the CB is set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established.

  If any BB winning is established, the BB winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and BB is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. The flag is set. Thereafter, in step S612, 216 is set in the remaining payout number counter, and a process of displaying 216 on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is performed. The numerical value set in step S612 is a numerical value corresponding to the upper limit payout number in the BB state, and the BB state is terminated on condition that medals having been paid out in the BB state have been paid out.

  By performing the processing of steps S610 to S612, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. In step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current gaming state is the BB state based on the BB setting flag being set in the state information storage area 106c, and the corresponding lottery table for the BB state is selected. .

  FIG. 28 is a BB state lottery table selected in the BB state that is shifted in the first BB or the second BB. In the lottery table for the BB state, “0” is set as the point value PV of IV = 1 to 27, 31 to 49, and “21845” is set as the point value of IV = 28 to 30. Therefore, in the BB state, the probability of winning the BB medium role 1 (the probability of winning when IV = 28) is about 1 / 3.00, and the probability of winning the 7 red matches in the BB (IV = Probability of winning when 29 = 29) is about 1 / 3.00, and the probability of winning a BAR match in BB (probability of winning when IV = 30) is about 1 / 3.00. It becomes. The probability of losing no winning combination is about 1/65500.

  FIG. 27B is an explanatory diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode established. As described above, the first small role winning is a winning mode that can be established regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, the first small size is selected regardless of whether the winning combination is the BB medium / small combination 1, the BB medium red 7 combination, or the BB medium BAR uniform combination. Any of the winning combination, the 30th small role winning, and the 31st small winning combination must be established. Since the BB state is a 3-bet game, nine medals are paid out when the first small role winning, the 30th small winning combination, and the 31st small winning combination are established. Since the probability of losing in the BB state is about 1/65500, it can be said that the BB state is a gaming state in which nine medals are paid out with a very high probability.

  If the gaming state has shifted to the CB state or the BB state, an affirmative determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S613. In the end determination process, it is determined whether or not the value of the remaining payout counter is 0. In the end determination process, when the BB setting flag is cleared, an end flag indicating that the BB state has ended in the current game is set. The end determination process will be described in detail later.

  As shown in steps S602 to S613, when a CB is won and a CB winning is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. For this reason, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state when the CB winning is established is returned. For example, when a CB winning is achieved under the normal gaming state, the game returns to the normal gaming state after the CB state ends, and when a CB winning is achieved under the third RT state, the third RT state is completed after the CB state ends. Return to. On the other hand, when the first BB and the second BB are won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether or not the corresponding BB winning is established. For this reason, when the BB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the BB state is ended, even if the first BB winning is established under the second RT state, the state shifts to the normal gaming state. By the way, when transitioning to the CB state, the player can expect an increase of 13 (= 15-2) or 25 (= 14-2 + 15-2) medals until the end of the CB state. When transitioning to the BB state, the player can expect an increase of about 144 (= 9 × 24−3 × 24) medals until the end of the BB state.

  When none of the first BB winning flag, the second BB winning flag, and the CB winning flag is set (when step S602 is NO), or when none of the first BB winning, the second BB winning, and the CB winning is established ( If step S609 is NO), if a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605 and S612, and if the end determination process is performed in step S613, the process proceeds to step S606. Set the status command. Here, the state command is a command that is transmitted to the sub-control device 81 in order to grasp the gaming state at the time of the end of the game (that is, the gaming state of the next game). A status command corresponding to the setting flag set in 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, external signal setting processing for setting an external signal to be output from the external concentrated terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10 is performed. Thereafter, this process is terminated.

<Overview of game state transition and display mode>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to FIG. Note that the illustration of the CB state is omitted.

  When the gaming state is the BB state, the BB state ends when the number of medals paid out in the BB state reaches 216, and the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state.

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state by stopping the transition outcome on the active line, and when the BB winning is established, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. The transition is stopped on the active line when a game is won in the push order bell and a missing game occurs. In the lottery process using the normal gaming state lottery table, the first promoted replays 1 to 4 that trigger the transition to the second RT state and the second promoted replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the normal gaming state does not shift to the second RT state and the third RT state (see FIG. 17).

  When the gaming state is the first RT state, the gaming state shifts to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. The third replay winning prize is established when one of the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23A). . In the lottery process using the first RT state lottery table, the second promoted replays 1 and 2 that trigger the transition to the third RT state are not won. Therefore, the first RT state does not shift to the third RT state.

  Further, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each 1BB winning flag is set. When a corresponding BB winning is established in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state. From the first RT state, there is no transition to the third RT state.

  When the gaming state is the second RT state, the gaming state shifts to the third RT state when the fourth re-game winning or the fifth re-game winning is established. In addition, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the second re-game winning is established and when the transition outcome is stopped on the active line. The fourth regame winning and the fifth replay winning are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (FIG. 23B). )reference). The second regame winning is established when one of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23B). The transition is stopped on the active line when a game is won in the push order bell and a missing game occurs. In addition, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each BB winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag When the corresponding BB winning is established in the game in which is set, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  When the gaming state is the third RT state, the gaming state is shifted to the second RT state when the third re-game winning is established. In addition, the gaming state shifts to the first RT state when the second re-game winning is established and when the transition outcome is stopped on the active line. The third replay winning is established when BAR replay 1 or BAR replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation order (see FIG. 23C). The second regame winning is established when one of the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23B). The transition is stopped on the active line when a game is won in the push order bell and a missing game occurs. In addition, when the corresponding BB winning is not established in the game in which each winning flag is set, that is, when the BB winning flag is carried over, the gaming state shifts to the normal gaming state, and each BB winning flag is When a corresponding BB winning is established in the set game, the gaming state shifts to the BB state.

  Incidentally, when each BB winning flag is carried over, a lottery table for carryover (not shown) is used as the lottery table in the lottery process (FIG. 16). In the carry-out lottery table, the PV values of IV1 to 22 are the same as the PV values of IV1 to 22 in the normal gaming state lottery table (FIG. 17), and the PV values after IV23 are set to 0. ing. That is, in the carry-out lottery table, bonuses and overlapping small combinations with bonuses are not won.

  In the slot machine 10, the main control device 101 manages six kinds of game states of a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a BB state, and a CB state, and is roughly divided into a normal mode and a challenge mode. , Attack mode, VB mode (including additional specialization zone), and BB mode, the main controller 101 manages the five display modes.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating transition of each display mode.

  The BB mode is a display mode that shifts when the first BB winning or the second BB winning is established and ends when the BB state ends. That is, the BB mode is a display mode corresponding to the BB state. Therefore, when shifting to the BB mode, the player can expect an increase of about 144 medals.

  When transitioning from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the BB mode, in the BB mode, a transition lottery to the challenge mode and a lottery to transition to the attack mode are performed. When winning the lottery for shifting to the attack mode, the mode shifts to the attack mode after the end of the BB mode, and when winning the lottery for shifting to the challenge mode, the mode shifts to the challenge mode after the end of the BB mode. If none of the transition lotteries is won, the mode shifts to the normal mode after the BB mode ends. When the mode is changed from the attack mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the attack mode after the end of the BB mode. When transitioning from the VB mode to the BB mode, the mode returns to the VB mode after the BB mode ends.

  The normal mode means that the push order bell is won, the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4, the fall replay 1 to the fall replay 3, the second promotion replay 1, the second promotion replay 2, the BAR replay 1, and the BAR replay. 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as “push order replay”). This is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of winning. In the normal mode, a lottery for shifting to the challenge mode and a lottery for shifting to the attack mode are performed. When the lottery for the transition to the challenge mode is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the challenge mode, and when the lottery for the transition to the attack mode is won, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the attack mode. From the normal mode, the mode does not shift to the VB mode.

  The normal mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, since the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of pushing order bell winning and at the time of pushing order replay winning, it is rare to shift to the second RT state and the third RT state, This corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 per game, and the gaming state at that time will be the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 every time one game is played.

  Like the normal mode, the challenge mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of pushing order bell winning and at the time of pushing order replay winning. In the challenge mode, a lottery for shifting to the attack mode is performed. However, the winning probability of the lottery transition to the attack mode in the challenge mode is set higher than the winning probability of the lottery transition to the attack mode in the normal mode. That is, the challenge mode is set as a mode in which the operation order is not easily notified as in the normal mode, but the mode is easily shifted to the attack mode. When winning the lottery for shifting to the attack mode, the mode shifts from the challenge mode to the attack mode. When a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 times) are played without winning the above-mentioned transfer lottery, the mode is changed from the challenge mode to the normal mode. From challenge mode, it does not shift to VB mode.

  The challenge mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the challenge mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified at the time of pushing order replay win, so it is rare to shift to the 2nd RT state and the 3rd RT state, and almost corresponds to the normal gaming state or the 1st RT state. Will be. In the challenge mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 1.59 per game, and the gaming state at that time will be the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will decrease by about 0.06 every time one game is played.

  The attack mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both of the push order bell win and the push order replay win. The attack mode is composed of four attack modes, the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode, which have different transition probabilities to the VB mode. The transition probability is high. When the lottery for the transition to the VB mode is won, the mode is shifted from the attack mode to the VB mode. When a predetermined number of games (for example, 50 times) are played without winning the lottery for the transition to the VB mode, the mode is shifted from the attack mode to the normal mode.

  The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set so that the probabilities of winning the lottery for the transition to the VB mode are different. More specifically, the probability of winning the transition lottery to the VB mode is set so that the fourth attack mode is the highest and the first attack mode is the lowest, and the first attack mode and the second attack mode are set. The probability of winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode in the order of the third attack mode and the fourth attack mode is set.

  The attack mode corresponds to each game state of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the attack mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so the stop switch 42 is operated in the order of the notice given to the player. When .about.44 is operated, it corresponds to the second RT state. In the attack mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 each time one game is played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for every game played. Since the attack mode continues for at least 50 games after the gaming state shifts to the second RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 100 medals when shifting to the attack mode.

  Similar to the attack mode, the VB mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both in the push order bell win and in the push order replay win. The difference between the VB mode and the attack mode is that, when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won, the operation order for establishing the first replay prize is notified in the attack mode. In the VB mode, the operation order for establishing the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is notified (see FIG. 23B).

  The VB mode corresponds to each gaming state of the normal gaming state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the VB mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified in both the push order bell win and the push order replay win, and the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 wins. In such a case, the operation order for establishing the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is notified. For this reason, the VB mode substantially corresponds to the third RT state when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order notified by the player. In the VB mode, if the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 0.61 every time one game is played, and the gaming state at that time is the second RT state or In the third RT state, it can be expected that the number of medals will increase by about 1.90 for every game played. In the VB mode, since at least 25 games are continued after the gaming state shifts to the third RT state, the player can expect an increase of about 50 medals when shifting to the VB mode.

  The transition of the display mode when the number of medals owned by the player increases will be explained. The general flow is that the mode is changed from the normal mode to the challenge mode, the challenge mode is changed to the attack mode, and the attack mode is returned to the normal mode. . In the attack mode, a lottery for the transition to the VB mode is performed. Therefore, when a loop occurs in which the transition is made from the attack mode to the VB mode and the mode returns from the VB mode to the attack mode, the player expects an increase in the number of owned medals. it can.

  As described above, when compared between the normal mode and the challenge mode, the probability that the winning lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won is set higher in the challenge mode than in the normal mode. Therefore, the challenge mode is also referred to as a so-called chance zone in which a transition to the attack mode is expected.

  The first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are set in the attack mode, and the winning probabilities of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode are different in each attack mode. When shifting from the normal mode or the challenge mode to the attack mode, the mode basically shifts to the first attack mode. In the first attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the second attack mode is performed. When winning the lottery for shifting to the second attack mode, the player shifts to the second attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. In the second attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed, and a lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is performed. When the lottery for shifting to the third attack mode is won, the player shifts to the third attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode increases. In the third attack mode, a lottery for shifting to the VB mode is performed and a lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is performed. When the lottery for shifting to the fourth attack mode is won, the mode is shifted to the fourth attack mode, and the winning probability of the lottery for shifting to the VB mode is increased.

  Therefore, when the mode is changed to the attack mode, the first attack mode → the second attack mode → the third attack mode → the fourth attack mode and the attack mode are promoted, so that the probability of transition to the VB mode is increased and the attack is performed. A loop between the mode and the VB mode is likely to occur.

  As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured such that the player increases the number of owned medals in each display mode of the attack mode, the VB mode, and the BB mode. Then, in conjunction with each display mode, a plurality of states such as a plurality of RT states, a BB state, and a CB state come and go by the winning of each replay or the stoppage of the transition and the like. As described above, the corresponding re-game winning is established or the transition outcome is stopped depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 43 at the time of pushing order replay winning or at the time of pushing order bell winning. Further, in the attack mode and the VB mode, an increase in the number of owned medals can be expected by notifying the operation order that allows the first small role winning to be established at the time of pushing order bell winning.

  Hereinafter, a configuration related to the display mode will be described.

  The configuration related to the display mode can be broadly divided into (1) processing related to the display mode transition lottery, (2) processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, and (3) based on the winning result. There is a process for shifting the display mode, and (4) a process related to the sub notification effect. Hereinafter, it demonstrates in order.

<Processing for display mode transition lottery>
<Lottery result handling process>
The process related to the display mode transition lottery in (1) is performed in the lottery result handling process (step S310) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101. The lottery result handling process will be described below with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S701, as the current lottery results, strong cherry, weak cherry, watermelon, chances A and B and middle bell, strong cherry duplication 1, 2, weak cherry duplication 1, 2, watermelon duplication 1, 2, chance A duplication 1 , 2, chance B overlap 1, 2 and middle bell overlap 1, 2 (for example, see FIG. 17, IV = 13-18, 31-42, hereinafter these roles are collectively referred to as “specific roles”) Determine whether or not. When the lottery result is a specific combination, processing for transition of the display mode based on the specific combination in steps S702 to S708 is executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S701 that it is not a specific winning combination, display mode transition processing or the like is performed in steps S709 to S712.

  Specifically, if it is determined in step S701 that the specific combination is won, it is determined in step S702 whether the current gaming state is the normal gaming state or the first RT state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S702, it is determined in step S703 whether an attack mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the attack mode shift lottery and cleared when shifting to the attack mode. If a negative determination is made in step S703, the first specific combination process is executed in step S704.

<First Specific Role Processing>
The first specific combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, the case where the first specific combination process is performed is a normal gaming state or a first RT state and a state where the attack mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the normal mode or the challenge mode. In the first specific combination process, a transition lottery for determining whether to shift the display mode to the challenge mode is performed, and a transition lottery for determining whether to shift to the attack mode is performed. In the first specific combination process, if the current display mode is the challenge mode, a process for adding the number of continuous games in the challenge mode is performed.

  That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. When not in the challenge mode, it means that the current display mode is the normal mode. If a negative determination is made in step S801, a normal time table is acquired as a table for attack mode lottery from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 in step S802. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S801, a chance mode table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105 as an attack mode lottery table in step S803. In the normal time table and the chance mode table, the probability of transition to the attack mode is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to the attack mode than the weak cherries. Also, the normal mode table and the chance mode table generally have different transition probability to the attack mode, and the chance mode table has a higher probability of transition to the attack mode than the normal time table. Is set to

  After acquiring the attack mode lottery table in step S802 or step S803, the attack mode lottery process is executed in step S804. In this process, a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106, and the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is performed by comparing with the lottery table acquired in step S802 or step S803.

  In step S805, based on the processing result in step S804, it is determined whether or not the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has been won. When the lottery for shifting to the attack mode is won, a process for setting an attack mode winning flag is performed in step S806.

  In a succeeding step S807, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If a negative determination is made in step S807, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S808. Here, in the present embodiment, when winning the transition lottery to the challenge mode, the attack mode or the VB mode as the display mode transition lottery, the notification that the transition lottery has been won after passing through the precursor mode. Done. Therefore, the game that won the transition lottery may be different from the game that is notified that the transition lottery was won, and from the game that won the transition lottery to the game where the transition lottery notification is performed. , Set as a precursor mode.

  As the number of precursor games, 1 to 32 games are set, and in step S808, one of these 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. It should be noted that the number of precursor games to be selected may be set to be different depending on the specific combination that has been won in the attack mode and the gaming state. The same applies to the lottery processing for the number of other precursor games.

  In step S809, based on the processing result in step S808, processing for inputting the number of precursor games to the precursor counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is performed. The sign counter is a counter that is decremented by 1 for each game. When the sign counter reaches 0, the sign mode is terminated and a notification that the transition lottery has been won is given.

  In step S810, processing for setting the precursor command as an output target to the sub-control device 81 is executed. The precursor command includes information on the lottery result (the display mode to be shifted to after the precursor mode, the attack mode in the case of step S810) and the number of precursor games that triggered the precursor mode. The processing on the sub-control device 81 side based on the reception of the precursor command will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S810, the first specific combination process is terminated.

  If the bonus winning flag is set in step S807, the first specific combination process is terminated as it is without setting the number of precursor games. When the bonus winning flag is set, it means that the specified combination is won in the carry-over state of the first BB or the second BB, and if the winning lottery is selected in the attack mode, or the combination with the bonus (strong cherry overlapping 1, 2 etc.) is a case where the attack mode lottery is won. In this case, the BB mode is prioritized instead of the attack mode as the display mode transition destination.

  If it is determined in step S805 that the lottery for shifting to the attack mode has not been won, the process proceeds to step S811. In step S811, a challenge mode lottery process is executed. In the challenge mode lottery process, a challenge mode lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. In the challenge mode lottery table, the probability of transition to the challenge mode is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in strong cherries and weak cherries, strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to challenge mode than weak cherries.

  Although the case where the display mode is the challenge mode is included as a case where step S811 is implemented, in this case also, the challenge mode lottery process is executed in step S811, and the table for the lottery is common to the normal mode and the challenge mode. With a table. Note that, as in steps S801 to S803, the lottery table may be varied depending on whether or not the challenge mode is being performed.

  In step S812, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode is won based on the processing result of step S811. If it is determined that the challenge mode is won, it is determined in step S813 whether or not the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is not the challenge mode but the normal mode, in step S814, processing for setting a challenge mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is executed.

  In the subsequent step S815, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If it is set, the first specific combination process is terminated as it is. If not set, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S816, a process for setting the number of precursor games in the precursor counter is executed in step S817, and a process for setting a precursor command is executed in step S818. After that, the first specific combination process is terminated. Steps S815 to S818 correspond to steps S807 to S810.

  If it is determined in step S813 that the challenge mode has been won again during the challenge mode, a process for adding a continuous game in the challenge mode is performed in steps S819 to S823. That is, in step S819, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S820 to execute a lottery process for adding the number of games in the challenge mode.

  Here, adding up means adding the number of continuing games in challenge mode or attack mode, and the number of adding up games corresponds to a value added to the number of continuing games. In step S820, a value to be added to the number of continuing games in the challenge mode is determined by lottery.

  Specifically, in the lottery process for the extra game number, a table for challenge mode extra game number lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. The challenge mode extra game number lottery table is set so that the extra game number increases according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in the strong cherry, the challenge mode of 30 games is added with a probability of 80%, and the 50 games are added with a probability of 20%. On the other hand, for weak cherries, 5 games are added with a probability of 80%, and 20 games are added with a probability of 20%.

  In step S821, the number of games in challenge mode is added. In such a process, a value corresponding to the number of added games selected in step S820 is added to a counter (more specifically, a challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) that manages the number of continuous games in the challenge mode. Perform the addition process. Then, in step S822, a process for setting the addition command as an output target to the sub-control device 81 is performed, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The addition command includes information on the occurrence of the addition, the number of additional games, and the target to be added (challenge mode or attack mode). The processing on the side of the sub-control device 81 that has received the addition command will be described in detail later, but the sub-control device 81 adds information as a notification of information included in the addition command based on the reception of the addition command. Announcement (addition effect) is performed.

  If the bonus winning flag is set in step S819, the process proceeds to step S823. In step S823, the challenge mode addition flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the first specific combination process is terminated. The challenge mode extra flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the extra condition for the number of games in the challenge mode is satisfied. Although details will be described later, when the bonus is ended in a situation where the challenge mode additional flag is set, the challenge mode is added at the end of the bonus.

  Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if a negative determination is made in step S702 or an affirmative determination is made in step S703, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the second RT state. If it is in the second RT state, it is determined in step S706 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB mode winning flag is a flag that is set when winning in the transition lottery of the VB mode and cleared when shifting to the VB mode. If a negative determination is made in step S706, the second specific combination process is executed in step S707. If a negative determination is made in step S705 or if an affirmative determination is made in step S706, the third specific combination process is executed in step S708.

<Second specific role processing>
The second specific combination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  Here, the case where the second specific combination process is performed is a state in which the second RT state is set and the VB mode is not won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode. In the second specific combination process, a transfer lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift the display mode to the VB mode. Further, in the second specific combination process, the rank in the attack mode is promoted and the process for adding the number of continuous games in the attack mode is performed.

  That is, in step S901, processing for determining the rank of the attack mode is performed. As already described, in this embodiment, four attack mode ranks of the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode are provided, and the transition probability to the VB mode is different in each rank. Therefore, step S901 determines whether the rank of the current attack mode is the first attack mode to the fourth attack mode.

  In step S902, a VB mode lottery table corresponding to the rank of the attack mode grasped in step S901 is acquired from the various table storage areas 105a of the ROM 105. In the VB mode lottery table, the transition probability to the VB mode is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in strong cherries and weak cherries, the strong cherries are set to have a higher probability of transition to the VB mode than the weak cherries. Further, in the VB mode lottery table of each rank, the transition probability to the VB mode is totally different, and the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the second attack mode than in the first attack mode. As described above, the third attack mode is higher in the VB mode than the third attack mode so that the transition probability to the VB mode is higher in the third attack mode than in the second attack mode. The transition probability is set to be high.

  In step S903, the transfer lottery in the VB mode is performed using the table acquired in step S902 and the lottery counter acquired from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. In step S904, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S903 corresponds to the VB mode winning.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S904, processing for setting the VB mode winning flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S905. Thereafter, in steps S906 to S909, processing for setting the number of precursor games is performed as in steps S807 to S810. That is, in step S906, it is determined whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If it is set, the second specific combination process is terminated as it is. If not set, a lottery process for the number of precursor games is executed in step S907, a process for setting the number of precursor games in the precursor counter is executed in step S908, and a process for setting a precursor command is executed in step S909. After that, the second specific combination process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S904 that the result of the VB mode lottery process is not the VB mode winning, the process proceeds to step S910. Steps S910 to S913 are processing for promoting the rank of the attack mode.

  In step S910, an attack mode promotion lottery process is performed. In this process, a table for promotion lottery is acquired from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105, and a counter for lottery is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. A plurality of promotion lottery tables are provided according to the rank of the attack mode. Specifically, a table for the first attack mode, a table for the second attack mode, a table for the third attack mode, There are three (the promotion lottery is not performed in the situation of staying in the fourth attack mode). In each table, the winning probability of the promotion lottery is set according to the type of the specific combination. For example, in strong cherries and weak cherries, strong cherries are set to have higher winning probabilities for promotion lottery than weak cherries. Further, in each attack mode table, the third attack mode table is lower than the second attack mode table so that the promotion probability is lower in the second attack mode table than in the first attack mode table. The attack mode table is set so that the promotion probability is lower, and the attack mode rank is set so that it is less likely to be promoted to the next rank as the rank of the attack mode is promoted.

  In step S911, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S910 is a promotion win. If it is a promotion win, attack mode promotion processing is performed in step S912. In this process, the rank flag provided in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is rewritten from the rank flag corresponding to the current attack mode rank to the rank flag one higher. Thereafter, in step S913, processing for setting the promotion command as an output target to the sub-control device 81 is performed. The promotion command includes information on the attack mode of the promotion destination. The sub-control device 81 that has received the promotion command controls the display control device 201 and the sound source IC so as to produce an effect for the attack mode of the rank to be promoted. As an effect for the attack mode in the liquid crystal display device 65, for example, an effect of a different background color is set according to the rank of the attack mode, and when the sub-control device 81 receives the promotion command, the attack mode While notifying that the rank has been promoted, the display control apparatus 201 is controlled so as to produce an attack mode effect with a background color corresponding to the rank of the promoted destination.

  If it is determined in step S911 that the promotion lottery has not been won, or after the processing of step S913 is executed, processing for adding the number of continued games in the attack mode is performed in steps S915 to S920.

  That is, in step S914, a lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode is performed. In this extra lottery process, an attack mode extra lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. The attack mode extra lottery table is set so that the probability of winning the extra lottery differs according to the type of the specific combination. For example, a strong cherry wins an extra lottery with a probability of 80%, and a weak cherry wins an extra lottery with a probability of 20%. The winning probabilities may be varied according to the rank of the attack mode. In step S915, it is determined whether or not the extra lottery is won. If it is determined that the extra lottery is not won, the second specific combination process is terminated as it is.

  If it is determined that the bonus lottery is won, it is determined in step S916 whether a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S917 to perform a lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode. In the extra game number lottery process, an attack mode extra game number lottery table is obtained from the various table storage areas 105 a of the ROM 105, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter areas 106 e of the RAM 106. The attack mode extra game number lottery table is set so that the extra game number varies depending on the type of the specific combination. For example, in strong cherry, an attack mode of 20 games is added with a 90% probability, and 80 games are added with a 10% probability. In addition, in the weak cherry, 5 games are added with a probability of 95%, and 100 games are added with a probability of 5%.

  In step S918, the number of games in the attack mode is added. In this process, a counter (more specifically, an attack mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106) for managing the number of continued games in the attack mode is set to a value corresponding to the number of added games lottery in step S917. Perform the addition process. In step S919, a process for setting the addition command as an output target to the sub-control device 81 is performed, and then the second specific combination process is terminated.

  If the bonus winning flag is set in step S916, the process proceeds to step S920. In step S920, an attack mode additional flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106, and then the second specific combination process is terminated. The attack mode additional flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the additional condition for the number of games in the attack mode is satisfied. Although details will be described later, when the bonus ends in a situation where the attack mode additional flag is set, the attack mode is added at the end of the bonus.

<Third specific role processing>
Next, the third specific combination process executed in step S708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  The case where the third specific combination process is performed is a state in which it is in the third RT state or in the second RT state and the VB mode is won. The display mode in this case corresponds to the attack mode or the VB mode. In the third specific combination process, a process for adding the number of continued games in the attack mode is performed.

  That is, in step S1001, lottery processing is performed by adding the number of games in the attack mode. Such processing is similar to the processing in step S914. In addition, the winning probability of the extra lottery may be different between the lottery process in step S914 and the lottery process in step S1001.

  In step S1002, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S1001 is an extra winning result. If it is determined that the bonus lottery is won, it is determined in step S1003 whether or not a bonus winning flag is set. If the bonus winning flag is not set, the process advances to step S1004 to perform a lottery process for adding the number of games in the attack mode. Then, in step S1005, an attack mode game number adding process is performed, and in step S1006, an adding command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81, and then the third specific combination process is terminated. The processing from step S1003 to step S1006 is the same as the processing from step S916 to step S919. Note that the number of added games may be different between the lottery process in step S916 and the lottery process in step S1004.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1002, the third specific combination process is terminated as it is. If it is determined in step S1003 that the bonus winning flag is set, the third specific combination process is terminated after setting the attack mode extra flag in step S1007. The attack mode extra flag is as described above.

  Returning to the description of the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31), if it is determined in step S701 that the result of the current lottery process is not a specific winning combination, the result of the current lottery process is pushed in step S709. It is determined whether or not a winning replay or pushing order bell (hereinafter collectively referred to as “pushing order”) has been won. If it is a push order winning combination, a push order process is executed in step S710. The push order process will be described later in detail.

  After executing any of the processes of step S704, step S707, step S708, and step S710, or after making a negative determination in step S709, the process proceeds to step S711. In step S711, it is determined whether or not the special zone flag corresponding to the special zone added to the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is set. The special zone flag is a flag that is set based on the fact that the seventh replay winning is established. Indicates a state that occurs with probability. If the special zone flag is set in step S711, special zone processing is executed in step S712. The special zone flag, special zone, and special zone processing will be described later in detail. When a negative determination is made in step S711, or after the process of step S712 is executed, the lottery result handling process ends.

  As described above, in the lottery result handling process, when it is determined that the specific role is won, the process for the transition to the challenge mode, the attack mode or the VB mode or the number of continued games in the challenge mode or the attack mode is added. Etc. are performed. In the case of winning the transition lottery to the challenge mode, attack mode or VB mode, after the sign game, the fact that the transition lottery has been won is notified. Therefore, processing for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery will be described below.

<Processing for transitioning gaming state based on display mode transition lottery result>
(2) In the process for shifting the gaming state based on the result of the display mode transition lottery, the process for notifying that the display mode transition lottery has been won and the notification for shifting the gaming state are performed. And processing for performing. Therefore, first, a process related to notification that the transfer lottery has been won will be described.

<Mode transition notification processing>
Notification of winning the transition lottery is performed in the mode transition notification process (step S206) in the normal process (FIG. 15). The mode transition notification process is a process that is performed when a predetermined bet operation is performed (when it is determined that the number of bets in step S205 is a specified number). Hereinafter, the mode transition notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1101, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. The number of precursor games is counted in a winning result corresponding process described later, and the number of precursor games is decremented by one each time one game is consumed. If the number of precursor games is not 0, the mode transition notification process is terminated as it is.

  If the number of precursor games is 0, it is determined in step S1102 whether the challenge mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current sign mode is a sign mode triggered by the challenge mode winning. If the challenge mode winning flag is set, the challenge mode winning flag is cleared in step S1103. In step S1104, a challenge mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The challenge mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that the current display mode is the challenge mode. In step S1105, a challenge mode start command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the challenge mode start command notifies the liquid crystal display device 65 and the like that the challenge mode is started. This notification will be described in detail later.

  Thereafter, in step S1106, counting of the challenge mode continuation number is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 10) of the number of continued games in the challenge mode is set in a challenge mode continuation counter provided in various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1106, the mode transition notification process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1102 that the challenge mode winning flag has not been set, it is determined in step S1107 whether or not the attack mode winning flag has been set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current precursor mode is a precursor mode triggered by the attack mode winning. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the attack mode winning flag is cleared in step S1108. In step S1109, an attack notification flag is set in various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The attack notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state when the attack mode transition lottery is won. Thereafter, an attack mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81 in step S1110. The sub-control device 81 that has received the attack mode winning notification command notifies the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like that the attack mode winning lottery has been won. This notification will be described in detail later. After executing the process of step S1110, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1107 that the attack mode winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1111 whether or not the VB mode winning flag is set. That is, it is determined whether or not the current sign mode is a sign mode triggered by the VB mode winning. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the VB mode winning flag is cleared in step S1112. In step S1113, a VB notification flag is set in various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. The VB notification flag is a flag for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state when the VB mode transition lottery is won. Thereafter, the VB mode winning notification command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81 in step S1114. The sub-control device 81 that has received the VB mode winning notification command notifies the liquid crystal display device 65 and the like that the VB mode winning lottery has been won. This notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1114, this mode transition notification process is terminated. If it is determined in step S1111 that the VB mode winning flag has not been set, the mode transition notification process is terminated.

  That is, among the challenge mode, attack mode, and VB mode that shifts through the precursor mode, the challenge mode is started based on the betting operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes zero. On the other hand, for the attack mode and the VB mode, based on the bet operation when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes zero, only the notification that the attack mode lottery or the VB mode transition lottery has been won is performed, and the precursor Even if the number of games becomes 0, the attack mode and the VB mode are not started. This is because the challenge mode as the display mode is not accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, while the attack mode and the VB mode are accompanied by the transition of the gaming state, specifically, the attack mode is shifted to the second RT state. This is due to the difference that the VB mode is started by transitioning to the third RT state.

  As already explained, the second RT state is the case where the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay winning is established, and the third RT state is changed to the second promotion replays 1 and 2. Is transferred to the case where the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are established. And when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won and the third replay prize is established, or when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are elected and the fourth and fifth regame prizes are established, This is a case where the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 at the time of winning the promotion replay corresponds to the third replay winning prize or the like. Therefore, when winning the lottery to shift to the attack mode or VB mode, after that, in the game that won the role that will shift the gaming state, notify the operation order of the stop switches 42-44, The game state can be changed. It should be noted that from the notification that the winning lottery of the attack mode or VB mode is won until the attack mode or VB mode is started (until the game state is shifted), a notification as a preparation state (for example, “ Notification in progress) is performed.

<Explanation regarding display mode transition>
The notification process for shifting the gaming state is performed in the push order process (step S710) in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). Here, prior to the description of the push order combination process, an outline when the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified will be described with reference to FIG.

<Outline of push order notification effect>
The operation order notification (push order notification effect) at the time of pushing order winning is mainly performed by the liquid crystal display device 65 and the pressing order notification unit 68. Here, a description will be given by taking as an example a case where the operation order to be notified this time is winning in the pressing order when the middle → right → left is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (a), in the liquid crystal display device 65, the button display corresponding to the stop switch to be operated first among the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44 (the middle stop in the figure). The number 1 is attached to the middle button display corresponding to the switch 43, and is displayed larger than the other button displays. Each button is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning combination (yellow for a bell, blue for a replay, etc.). Accordingly, the player can recognize that the winning combination in the current game and that the stop switch to be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. Further, in the liquid crystal display device 65, the right button display shows a numeric value so that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42. 2 is displayed, and the left button display is displayed with the numeral 3 added.

  In the push order notification unit 68, among the three LED lamps 68a, 68b, 68c provided side by side corresponding to the stop switches 42-44, the middle LED lamp 68b is turned on, and the left and right LEDs 68a, 68c lamps. Turns off. Thereby, the player can recognize that the stop switch to be operated first in the current game is the middle stop switch 43. Note that the push order notification unit 68 may be configured to notify the winning combination together with the push order by changing the color of the LED lamps to be turned on. Further, the lighting color of the LED lamp corresponding to the second and subsequent operations may be changed or blinked so that the stop switch to be operated after the second can also be recognized.

  When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 36B, in the liquid crystal display device 65, the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears, and the right button corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears. The button display is displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the right stop switch 44.

  In the push order notification unit 68, the middle LED lamp 68b is turned off and the right LED lamp 68c is turned on (the left LED lamp 68a remains turned off). Thus, the player can recognize that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

  When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 36C, the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears in the liquid crystal display device 65, and the left button corresponding to the left stop switch 42 disappears. The button display is displayed larger. Thereby, the player can confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 is completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

  In the push order notification unit 68, the right LED lamp 68c is turned off, and the left LED lamp 68a is turned on (the middle LED lamp 68b remains turned off). Thereby, the player can recognize that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed and that the stop switch to be operated next is the left stop switch 42.

  The execution timing of the push order notification effect will be described. During the invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from the start of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R to the constant speed rotation through the acceleration period, the push order is displayed. The notification effect is set to be executed. As described above, the push order notification effect is executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes valid, so that the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is recognized and the stop switches 42 to 44 are recognized. It is possible to make it desired for the operation of 44, and the game can be advanced with a good tempo.

<Push order processing>
Next, the pushing order process executed in step S710 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1201, it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 is a case where the first regame or the third regame wins according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1202, and it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As described above, the attack notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for entering the attack mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35). is there.

  If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1203, the third replay push order notification process is executed. Specifically, the operation order corresponding to the third re-game win among the first re-game and the third re-game is notified (see FIG. 23A). Thereafter, in step S1204, a process for setting the push order notification command as an output target to the sub-control device 81 is performed, and then the full push order process is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the sub-control device 81 side based on the reception of the push order notification command will be described in detail later.

  In the case where the notification of the operation order corresponding to the third replay winning is made in step S1203, basically, the winning mode lottery for winning the attack mode is won, and the winning mode is notified through the precursor mode. It is assumed that it is after the break and before the transition to the attack mode. That is, in the lottery table in the second RT state or the third RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won only in the first RT state. However, even after the transition to the attack mode, the gaming state may fall from the second RT state to the first RT state. Even in such a case, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won. By doing so, it is possible to quickly return to the second RT state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1201, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not the current lottery result is any one of the fall replays 1 to 3. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1205 is a case where the first regame or the second regame wins according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1206, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, in step S1207, the first replay push order notification processing is executed. Specifically, the operation order corresponding to the first regame winning is notified of the first regame and the second regame (see FIG. 23B). Thereafter, in step S1208, a process for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the full push order process is terminated.

  As described above, when the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in the situation of winning the lottery to shift to the attack mode, the game state is changed to the first by notifying the operation order corresponding to the third replay prize. It is possible to shift to the 2RT state. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1202, the push order process is terminated without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, in the first RT state, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, the first regame win is established, and the third regame win is established. There is.

  In addition, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won in a situation where the attack notification flag is set, the game state is shifted to the first RT state by notification of the operation order corresponding to the first re-game winning prize. It is possible not to let it. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1206, the push order process is terminated without performing the push order notification process. Therefore, for example, when the attack mode ends, the attack notification flag is cleared, and the display mode shifts to the normal mode, the second replay prize may be established by winning the fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state. Shifts from the second RT state to the first RT state.

  Also, for example, in the first RT state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the attack mode, and the operation order happens to correspond to the third regame win, and the third replay win is established. Even if it is a case (even if it is a case where it transfers to the 2nd RT state), the 2nd re-game winning prize may be established by winning of fall replays 1-3. Therefore, as described above, even if it happens to shift to the second RT state without winning the attack mode, it will immediately shift to the first RT state.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1209 whether the current lottery result is one of the second promotion replays 1 and 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1209 is a case where the first regame, the fourth regame, or the fifth regame wins according to the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1210, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1211 whether or not the VB notification flag is set in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106. As already described, the VB notification flag is a flag that is set when the number of precursor games in the precursor mode becomes 0 after winning the lottery for transition to the VB mode in the mode transition notification process (FIG. 35). is there.

  If the VB notification flag is set, the fourth regame or fifth regame push order notification processing is executed in step S1212. Specifically, among the first regame, the fourth regame, and the fifth regame, the operation order corresponding to the fourth regame prize or the fifth regame prize is notified (see FIG. 23B). Thereafter, in step S1213, a process for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the full push order process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1210, the push order process is terminated without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1211, the first replay push order notification process is executed in step S1207, and the push order notification command is set in step S1208. The regular push forward processing is terminated. Therefore, when the second promotion replays 1 and 2 are won without winning the VB mode, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning is performed if the attack mode is in progress, and must be in the attack mode. In this case, the push order notification effect is not performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1209, it is determined in step S1214 whether the current lottery result is one of BAR replays 1 and 2. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S1214 is a case where one of the first re-game, the third re-game, and the sixth re-game to the eighth re-game wins depending on the operation order of the current game. In this case, in step S1215, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1216 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the attack notification flag is set and the VB notification flag is set, in step S1217, a process for notifying the pressing order of the sixth to eighth games is executed. Specifically, among the first regame, the third regame, and the sixth regame to the eighth regame, the operation order corresponding to the sixth regame win to the eighth regame win is notified (FIG. 23 ( c)). Thereafter, in step S1218, a process for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the full push order process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1215, the push order process is terminated without performing the push order notification process. On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S1216, the first replay push order notification process is executed in step S1207 and the push order notification command is set in step S1208. The regular push forward processing is terminated. Therefore, if the BAR replays 1 and 2 are won without winning in the VB mode, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first replay winning is performed if the attack mode is in effect, and if not in the attack mode, it is pressed. No order announcement effect is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1214, it is determined in step S1219 whether or not the current lottery result is a push-bell winning. If it is a push-bell winning, it is determined in step S1220 whether the current display mode is the normal mode or the challenge mode. When it is not the normal mode or the challenge mode, a process for notifying the pressing order for notifying the operation order corresponding to the first small role winning is executed in step S1221 (see FIG. 19). Thereafter, in step S1222, a process for setting a push order notification command is performed, and then the full push order process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1219 or an affirmative determination is made in step S1220, the regular push forward process is terminated without performing the push order notification process.

<Process for shifting the display mode based on the winning result>
<Processing for winning results>
Next, as a result of the notification for shifting the gaming state as described above, a process when a winning combination corresponding to shifting the gaming state is won will be described (3). This process is performed in the winning result handling process (step S411) in the reel control process (FIG. 18). Hereinafter, the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1301, a game number management process is executed. Although details will be described later, in this game number management process, the number of continuation games in the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, and the specialized zone is counted in addition to the number of omens in the omen mode.

  In the subsequent step S1302, it is determined whether or not the result of the current stop is that the third re-game winning is established. As described above, when the third re-game winning is established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the gaming state to the second RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1303, it is determined whether or not the attack notification flag is set. If the attack notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1304 whether or not the current display mode is the attack mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not an attack mode flag is set in various flag storage areas 106d. The attack mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the attack mode. Incidentally, as a flag for specifying the display mode, a challenge mode flag, a VB mode flag, a specialized zone flag, and a BB mode flag are provided in addition to the attack mode flag. In the present embodiment, when the display mode is a mode corresponding to an RT state higher than the attack mode (VB mode, additional specialized zone), the attack mode flag is a flag corresponding to the mode (VB mode flag, (Specialized zone flag). Therefore, for example, the case where it is determined in step S1304 that the attack mode flag is set includes the case where the attack mode is being set, the case where the VB mode is being used, and the case where the attack zone is being specialized. .

  If the attack mode flag is set in step S1304, since the display mode is already the attack mode, the main winning result corresponding process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the attack mode flag is not set, the process for starting the attack mode is performed in steps S1305 to S1307.

  That is, in step S1305, the attack mode flag is set. In the subsequent step S1306, an attack mode start command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the attack mode start command notifies the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like that the attack mode is started from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. Thereafter, in step S1307, counting of the number of continued attack modes is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continued games in the attack mode is set in the attack mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1307, the main winning result corresponding process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1302 that the third regame prize has not been established, the process proceeds to step S1308. In step S1308, it is determined whether the fourth and fifth regame winnings are established as the current stop result. As described above, when the fourth and fifth re-game winnings are established, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), processing for shifting the gaming state to the third RT state is performed. In this case, in step S1309, it is determined whether or not the VB notification flag is set. When the VB notification flag is set, it is determined whether or not the VB mode flag is set. If the VB mode flag is set, since the display mode is already the VB mode, the present winning result corresponding process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the VB mode flag is not set, processing for starting the VB mode is performed in steps S1311 to S1313.

  That is, in step S1311, processing for setting the VB mode flag is performed. In this case, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is a mode in which the VB mode shifts through the attack mode and always shifts to the attack mode after the VB mode ends.

  Thereafter, in step S1312, the VB mode start command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81. The sub-control device 81 that has received the VB mode start command notifies the liquid crystal display device 65 and the like that the VB mode is started from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. In step S1313, counting of the VB mode continuation number is started. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 60) of the number of continuous games in the VB mode is set in the VB mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1313, the main winning result corresponding process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1308 that the fourth and fifth regame winnings have not been established, the process proceeds to step S1314. In step S1314, it is determined whether or not a seventh re-game winning is achieved as the current stop result. In the present embodiment, when the seventh replay winning is established, that is, the BAR symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the left reel 32L, the BAR symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the middle reel 32M, and the BAR symbol is stopped at the middle stage of the right reel 32R. When the BAR symbol is stopped on the middle combination line, it is configured to shift to the additional specialization zone. In the additional specialization zone, the number of continued games in the attack mode is increased not only for the specific combination but also for all the combinations that can be won (push order, specific combination and bonus). The case where the seventh regame winning is established is a case where the BAR replay 1 is won, and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the seventh replay winning (FIG. 23). (C)) In addition, it is a case where the 7th regame of the 1st, 6th and 7th regames is won for winning, for example, 20 minutes when winning BAR Replay 1 Win a lottery to win the 7th replay with a probability of 1.

  If the seventh regame winning is established, it is determined in step S1315 whether or not the VB notification flag is set. If the VB notification flag is set, processing for setting a special zone flag in the various flag storage areas 106d of the RAM 106 is performed in step S1316. The special zone flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to recognize that it is the above-described special zone, and the count of the number of continued games in the VB mode is stopped by setting the special zone flag. . In this case, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag coexist in the various flag storage areas 106d. This is because the specialized zone shifts to the VB mode and always shifts to the VB mode after completion of the specialized zone.

  Thereafter, the specialized zone start command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81 in step S1317. Receiving the special zone start command, the sub-control device 81 notifies the liquid crystal display device 65 and the like that the special zone is started from the next game. This notification will be described in detail later. In step S1318, counting of the number of continuations of the specialized zone is started. Specifically, an initial value (for example, 5) of the number of continuous games in the special zone is set in a special zone continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. After performing the process of step S1318, the main winning result corresponding process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1314 or step S1315, the winning result handling process is terminated as it is.

  As described above, based on the winning of the combination (third to fifth replays) corresponding to the transition of the game state, the process for shifting the display mode is performed separately from the RT state process (FIG. 21). Do. This is to prevent the attack mode or the like from being started based on the fact that the winning combination corresponding to the transition of the gaming state happens to be won even though the display mode transition lottery is not won. It is.

  Also, when changing the display mode, among those accompanied by a transition of the gaming state, the transition to a higher mode, that is, when shifting from the normal mode or challenge mode to the attack mode, or when shifting from the attack mode to the VB mode, Alternatively, when shifting from the VB mode to the specialized zone, the shift is made based on the winning result of the corresponding winning combination. Therefore, the transition of the display mode and the transition of the gaming state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transition to the lower mode, the display mode is not transitioned when the game state transitions due to, for example, the second regame winning as a fall replay or the stop of the transitional turn. When shifting to a lower mode, the gaming state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to a lower mode, there is a possibility that the transition of the gaming state and the transition of the display mode are performed in different games.

<Game number management process>
The game number management process executed in step S1301 of the winning result handling process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the game number management process, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode is counted, and the number of continuing games in the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode, and specialized zone is counted, and the number of continuing games in these display modes is 0. Based on this, a process for terminating the corresponding display mode is performed.

  In the game number management process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the bet number is a specific number. As described above, in this embodiment, each game can be executed with the number of bets 1 to 3. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not there are 3 bets as the specific number. If it is not 3 bets, the game number management process is terminated. That is, in the 1-bet or 2-bet game, the number of games in the precursor mode and the number of continuous games in the challenge mode are not counted.

  If the game to be ended this time is a 3-bet game, the process proceeds to step S1402. In step S1402, it is determined whether the bonus winning flag is set or whether the bonus state is set. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1402, the process for clearing each display mode flag of the challenge mode flag, the attack mode flag, the VB mode flag, and the specialized zone flag is performed in step S1403, and then the game number management process ends. To do. That is, when the bonus winning flag is set or during the bonus, the number of games such as the attack mode is not counted. If each flag is not set in step S1403, the state is maintained.

  Incidentally, in step S1403, the attack mode flag and the VB mode flag are cleared, but the attack notification flag and the VB notification flag are not cleared. Therefore, after completion of the bonus, after passing through a preparation state such as an attack mode, a push order notification for shifting the gaming state is performed by these flags, and the gaming state before the bonus can be restored.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1402, it is determined in step S1404 whether or not the number of precursor games is zero. If it is not 0, a process of subtracting 1 from the number of precursor games is performed in step S1405. When the number of precursor games is 0 in step S1404 (not in the precursor mode), or after executing the processing of step S1405, the number of continuing games in each mode is counted in steps S1406 to S1427. .

  That is, in step S1406, it is determined whether the current display mode is the challenge mode. If it is in the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1407, and the challenge mode continuation counter is decremented by 1 by subtracting 1 from the challenge mode continuation counter. In step S1408, it is determined whether or not the challenge mode continuation counter is zero. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the challenge mode flag is cleared in step S1409, and a challenge mode end command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81 in step S1410. In the sub control device 81 that has received the challenge mode end command, the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like notifies the end of the challenge mode in the current game. After performing the process of step S1410, the game number management process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1406 that the current mode is not the challenge mode, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, it is determined whether the current display mode is the attack mode. If it is in the attack mode, the process proceeds to step S1412 to perform a process of subtracting 1 from the attack mode continuation counter, thereby subtracting the number of attack mode continuation games. In step S1413, it is determined whether or not the attack mode continuation counter is zero. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the attack mode flag is cleared in step S1414, and the attack notification flag is cleared in step S1415. Thereafter, the attack mode end command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81 in step S1416. The sub-control device 81 that has received the attack mode end command notifies the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like that the attack mode ends in the current game. This notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1416, the game number management process ends.

  If it is determined in step S1411 that the attack mode is not selected, the process advances to step S1417. In step S1417, it is determined whether the current display mode is the VB mode. If it is in the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S1418, and it is determined whether or not it is an extra special zone. If it is not the added special zone, the VB mode continuation counter is subtracted by 1 in step S1419 to subtract the VB mode continuation game number. In step S1420, it is determined whether or not the VB mode continuation counter is zero. If it is not 0, the game number management process is terminated as it is. If it is 0, the VB mode flag is cleared in step S1421, and the VB notification flag is cleared in step S1422. Thereafter, the VB mode end command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81 in step S1423. In the sub control device 81 that has received the VB mode end command, the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like notifies the end of the VB mode in the current game. This notification will be described in detail later. After performing the process of step S1423, the game number management process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S1418 that the zone is an additional specialization zone, the process proceeds to step S1424. In step S1424, the process of subtracting 1 from the special zone continuation counter is performed to subtract the number of special zone continuation games. In step S1425, it is determined whether the specialized zone continuation counter is zero. If it is 0, the special zone flag is cleared in step S1426, and a special zone end command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81 in step S1427. In the sub-control device 81 that has received the special zone end command, the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like notifies that the special zone is over in the current game. As this notification, for example, the number of games successfully added in total in the current special zone is notified. After performing the process of step S1427, the game number management process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1417 or step S1425, the game number management process is terminated as it is.

<End determination process>
Next, as a process at the end of the bonus, an end determination process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. As already described, the end determination process is a process performed in step S615 in the bonus state process (FIG. 26). In the end determination process, the success / failure condition of the bonus end condition is determined, and when the bonus is ended, a process for notifying the winning such as an attack mode overlapping with the bonus is performed, and an attack mode such as overlapping winning with the bonus is performed. The process for adding the number of games such as is performed.

  That is, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not a small winning combination has been established. As already described, during the bonus, the first small combination (BB medium / small combination 1) is established with high probability (FIG. 28). In addition, when the winning combination of 7 red in the BB (IV = 29) is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 30th small role winning (FIG. 27 (b)), When the 30th small combination of the first small combination and the 30th small combination is won, the 30th small combination winning is established. In the present embodiment, for example, a winning combination of winning the 30th small role is won with a probability of 1/100 in the case where a winning combination of 7 red in BB is won. When a winning combination with BAR in the BB (IV = 30) is won, the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation order corresponding to the 31st small winning combination (FIG. 27B), and the first small The 31st small role winning is established when the 31st small role out of the winning combination and the 31st small winning combination is won. In the present embodiment, for example, a winning combination of winning the 31st small role is won with a probability of 1/200 in the case where a winning combination with BAR in BB is won.

  If it is determined in step S1501 that a small role winning has been established, in step S1502, a process of subtracting the number of payouts of the current game from the number of remaining payouts is performed. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, or after executing the process of step S1502, an extra process is executed in step S1503. The extra process is a process for giving a privilege other than the game medium payout based on the result of the game in the current bonus. For example, if the game result of this time is that the 30th small role winning (lower red 7 assortment) is established, if the display mode before the bonus transition is the normal mode or the challenge mode, the attack mode is won, and the normal mode or If it is not in the challenge mode, the number of continued games in the attack mode is added (for example, 100 games). In addition, when the 31st small role winning (lower BAR alignment) is established, if the display mode before the bonus shift is the normal mode or the challenge mode, the attack mode and the VB mode are won, and if the attack mode is the attack mode, the VB mode is selected. In the VB mode, the player is elected to the special zone a plurality of times (for example, twice), and if in the special zone, the number of continued games in the attack mode is added (for example, 300 games). . In step S1503, a flag (attack mode winning flag or the like) corresponding to the transition of the display mode is set, and a counter addition process (addition process such as an attack mode continuation counter) according to the number of added games is performed.

  In a succeeding step S1504, it is determined whether or not the remaining payout number becomes zero. If it is not 0, the end determination process is ended as it is. If it is 0, a bonus end command is set as an output target to the sub-control device 81 in step S1505, and then in steps S1506 to S1519, winning notification processing such as attack mode, attack mode, etc. The process for adding the number of continued games is performed.

  That is, in step S1506, it is determined whether the attack mode winning flag is set. If the attack mode winning flag is set, the number of precursor games is selected in step S1507, the number of precursor games is set in step S1508, and the precursor command is set in step S1509. The processing from step S1507 to step S1509 is the same as the processing from step S808 to step S810. After executing the process of step S1509, the end determination process ends.

  That is, when the bonus is ended in the situation where the attack mode is won, after the bonus is over, the winning mode is notified through the precursor game. For this reason, after the bonus is over, the game can be performed while expecting to shift to an advantageous state again.

  Here, if a bonus is won during any of the precursor modes before notification of winning, the number of precursor games is already set when the lottery process for the number of precursor games is performed in step S1507. In this embodiment, even in such a case, the number of precursor games is reset. In other words, regardless of the number of remaining precursor games at the time of winning the bonus, after the bonus is over, the number of one precursor game among the 1 to 32 games is set again. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to feel the excitement after the bonus ends for a long time.

  If the attack mode winning flag is not set in step S1506, it is determined in step S1510 whether or not the challenge mode winning flag is set. When the challenge mode winning flag is set, the end determination process is ended after the process for the precursor mode in steps S1507 to S1509 is performed. If the challenge mode winning flag is not set in step S1510, it is determined in step S1511 whether the VB mode winning flag is set. If the VB mode winning flag is set, the end determination process is ended after the processing for the precursor mode in steps S1507 to S1509 is performed. That is, when the bonus is ended in the situation where the challenge mode or the VB mode is also won, after the bonus is ended, the winning notification of the challenge mode or the VB mode is performed through the precursor game.

  If the VB mode winning flag is not set in step S1511, the process proceeds to step S1512. In step S1512, it is determined whether the attack mode extra flag is set. If the attack mode extra flag is set, an attack mode extra game number lottery process is performed in step S1513, an attack mode game number extra process is performed in step S1514, and an extra command is set in step S1515. . The processes in steps S1513 to S1515 are the same as the processes in steps S917 to S919. After executing the process of step S1515, the end determination process ends.

  If the attack mode extra flag is not set in step S1512, it is determined in step S1516 whether or not the challenge mode extra flag is set. If the challenge mode extra flag is set, the challenge mode extra game number lottery process is performed in step S1517, the challenge mode game number extra process is performed in step S1518, and the extra command is set in step S1519. . The processes in steps S1517 to S1519 are the same as the processes in steps S820 to S822. When a negative determination is made in step S1516, or after the process of step S1519 is executed, the end determination process ends.

<Specialized zone processing>
Next, the specialized zone process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The specialized zone process is a process executed in step S712 in the lottery result handling process (FIG. 31). As already described, the game moves to the special zone during the VB mode, and during the special zone, the number of continuous games in each game and attack mode is added.

  That is, in the specialized zone process, first, in step S1601, the result of the current lottery process is grasped. In the subsequent step S1602, an extra game number lottery process is performed in the attack mode. In the subsequent step S1603, the number of games in the attack mode is added. In step S1604, after setting the addition command, the specialized zone processing is terminated. The processing from step S1602 to step S1604 is the same as the processing from step S917 to step S919. However, the number of selected games is larger in the additional game number lottery process in step S1602 than in the additional game number lottery process in step S917.

<Processing on sub-side notification effect>
Next, (4) various types of notification processing performed in the sub control device 81 will be described as processing related to the notification effect on the sub side. As various notification processes, an effect setting process executed at a predetermined cycle (2 msec cycle) is provided. Therefore, the effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the effect setting process, first, in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control apparatus 101. If a new command has been received, a process of storing the received command in the RAM 84 is executed in step S1702. The RAM 84 is provided with a command storage area, and the command storage area is configured as a ring buffer capable of storing a plurality of commands individually and reading from the previously stored commands.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1701 or after the processing of step S1702 is executed, it is determined in step S1703 whether or not the newly received command is a bet time command. The bet time command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the bet operation being performed. In addition to the bet command set in step S207 of the normal process, a mode transition notification process (see FIG. 35), a challenge mode start command, an attack mode winning notification command, a VB mode winning notification command, and the like. If these are betting commands, a betting effect setting process is executed in step S1704.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1703, or after the processing of step S1704 is executed, it is determined in step S1705 whether the newly received command is a start command. The start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41. In addition to the lottery result command set in step S311 of the lottery process, the first to first commands There are a precursor command and an extra command set in the third specific combination process (FIGS. 32 to 34), a push order notification command set in the push order combination process (FIG. 37), and the like. If these are the start time commands, the start time effect setting process is executed in step S1706.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1705, or after the processing of step S1706 has been executed, it is determined in step S1707 whether the newly received command is a command for each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on each stop operation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, and step S407 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). This command is set in the stop command response process at. If it is such a stop operation time command, a stop operation time effect setting process is executed in step S1708.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1707, or after the processing in step S1708 is executed, it is determined in step S1709 whether or not the newly received command is a command for all stoppages. The all stop command is a command output from the main controller 101 based on the fact that all the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped, and the winning result set in step S411 of the reel control process (FIG. 18). In addition to the command, the attack mode start command, VB mode start command, special zone start command, challenge mode end command, attack mode end command, VB mode end command, specialization set in the winning result handling process (FIG. 38) There is a zone end command. In the case of these all-stop commands, the all-stop effect setting process is executed in step S1710.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1709, or after the processing in step S1710 is executed, other processing is executed in step S1711. In step S1711, setting of effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than at the time of betting, starting, and stopping (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59) or connection without using the main control device 101 is established. An effect setting based on a signal from an effected sensor (such as an effect switch detection sensor) and an error notification setting are performed.

  After performing various effect setting processes in steps S1701 to S1711, the effect data setting process is performed in step S1712, and then the effect setting process ends. In the effect data setting process, display effect data (effect command) and sound effect are set so that the effect set by the sub-control device 81 is performed as a display effect by the display control device 201 and a sound effect by the sound source IC 85. This is a process of setting data (sound data) for use.

  Hereinafter, the betting time effect setting process, the start time effect setting process, each stop operation effect setting process, and the all stop effect setting process will be described. In addition, description of each production | presentation setting process is demonstrated referring the schematic diagram of the display production of FIGS. The effect data setting process will be described after each effect setting process. However, in the following description, display effects performed when display effect data and sound effect data are set based on each effect setting process. The outline of the sound production will also be described.

<Bet effect setting process>
The betting time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1801, it is determined whether or not a challenge mode start command is included as the currently received bet time command. If a challenge mode start command is included, processing for setting a challenge mode start effect is performed in step S1802. In the challenge mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (a), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the text “Challenge mode start”, and the display mode to be shifted is easy to win the attack mode shift lottery. A display (for example, a predetermined character display) suggesting the chance mode is performed. In addition, in the challenge mode start effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, “grab the attack mode!” With a thick male voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  If the challenge mode start command is not included in step S1801, it is determined in step S1803 whether or not the attack mode winning notification command is included as the currently received bet time command. If an attack mode winning notification command is included, in step S1804, processing for setting an attack mode winning notification effect is performed. In the attack mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (a), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the characters “attack mode confirmed”. In addition, in the attack mode winning notification effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, “attack number one!” In a high female voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  If the attack mode winning notification command is not included in step S1803, it is determined in step S1805 whether the VB mode winning notification command is included as the currently received bet time command. If the VB mode winning notification command is included, in step S1806, processing for setting the VB mode winning notification effect is performed. In the VB mode winning notification effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the liquid crystal display device 65 performs a character display of “determined Victory Bonus”. In addition, in the VB mode winning notification effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Victory!” In male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  After executing any one of the processes in step S1802, step S1804, and step S1806, or in the case where a negative determination is made in step S1805, after setting other betting effects in step S1807, this effect setting process Exit. In the process of step S1807, for example, in response to reception of a bet command, a process for notifying that the operation is accepted by turning off the lamps around (or inside) the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 corresponding to the number of bets. Or, for example, a process for returning from the demo mode in which a game is not performed for a predetermined time is returned to one condition, or a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned on to notify that the operation has become effective. Perform processing.

<Starting production setting process>
Next, the start time effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S1901, display mode setting processing is performed. In such processing, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main controller 101 side is the normal mode, the challenge mode, the attack mode, the VB mode, or the specialized zone, and the corresponding display mode is used. The display effect of the liquid crystal display device 65 is set to be performed. Specifically, a challenge mode flag, an attack mode flag, a VB mode flag, and a specialized zone flag are set as flags for grasping the display mode also in the various flag storage areas 84b of the RAM 84 on the sub-control device 81 side. An area is provided, and a corresponding flag is set at the start of each mode, and the corresponding flag is cleared at the end. For example, in the challenge mode start effect setting process in step S1802, the challenge mode flag is set. In step S1901, by grasping these various mode correspondence flags, the current display mode is specified, and the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, the upper lamp 63, and the like are controlled so that the corresponding effects are performed.

  Here, in the display mode setting process, when the display effect corresponding to the display mode has already been set, the display effect in the same display mode is not set again. That is, at the start of the game in which the display mode is changed, the display effect corresponding to the new display mode of the transfer destination is set. On the other hand, if the display mode is not changed, the display effect of the previous game is set. Continue. In this way, an increase in processing load due to the display mode setting process being performed at the start of each game is eliminated, and a new display effect is set by the transition of the display mode, and the display mode Due to the difference from the fact that the display effect of the previous game is continued by not shifting, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode has shifted. Moreover, it is also possible to associate the joy and discouragement that the display mode has shifted with this difference.

  In a succeeding step S1902, it is determined based on the received lottery result command whether the lottery result of the game started this time is a push forward winning combination. If it is determined that the push order is won, a push order notification process is performed in step S1903. Here, the push order notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2001, it is determined whether or not a push order notification command is included as the start command received this time. If the push order notification command is not included, the regular push order notification process is terminated. If a push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S2002.

  In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is the first promotion replays 1 to 4. In the case of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so as to notify the push order in which the third replay winning prize is established in step S2003, and then the push order. The notification process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2002 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not won, it is determined in step S2004 whether or not the current lottery result is the fall replays 1 to 3. In the case of the fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S2005, and the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so as to perform the push order notification that the first regame winning is established, and then the push order notification is performed. The process ends.

  If it is determined in step S2004 that it is not the fall replays 1 to 3, it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the current lottery result is the second promotion replays 1 and 2. In the case of the second promotion replays 1 and 2, it is determined in step S2007 whether or not the VB mode winning notification effect has already been executed. For example, when the VB mode winning notification effect is set in step S1806, a notification flag indicating that the notification of VB winning has been performed is set in the various flag storage areas 84b of the RAM 84. The notification flag is cleared based on the transition to the VB mode. And it is good to set it as the structure which determines the presence or absence of the said notification completion flag in step S2007. If the VB mode winning notification has been made, in step S2008, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so as to notify the push order in which the fourth and fifth regame winnings are established. The push order notification process is terminated. If the winning notification in the VB mode has not been completed, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first regame winning is performed, and then the push order notification processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2006 that it is not the second promoted replay 1, 2, it is determined in step S2009 whether the current lottery result is BAR replay 1, 2. In the case of BAR replays 1 and 2, in step S2010, the mode correspondence flag is checked to determine whether or not the current display mode is the VB mode. When in the VB mode, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so as to perform the push order notification in which the sixth to eighth re-game winnings are established in step S2011, and then the push order notification is performed. The process ends. If it is not in the VB mode, the process proceeds to step S2005, the push order notification for the first regame winning is performed, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2009 that it is not BAR replay 1 or 2, it is determined in step S2012 whether or not the current lottery result is a bell. In the case of the bell winning, in step S2013, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, and the like are controlled so as to notify the push order that the bell winning is established as the first small role, and then the push order notifying process. Exit. If a negative determination is made in step S2012, the push order notification process is terminated as it is.

  Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process (FIG. 44), if it is determined in step S1902 that it is not a push forward winning combination, it is determined in step S1904 whether or not a specific winning combination is selected. If it is a specific combination winning, a specific combination notification process is performed in step S1905. The specific combination notification process will be described later in detail.

  If a negative determination is made in step S1904, or after the processing in step S1903 or step S1905 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not an addition command is received as the current start command. If an additional command has been received, in step S1907, processing for setting the additional effect in advance is performed so that the additional effect of the number of games corresponding to the additional command is executed when stopped. As an extra effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58B, the liquid crystal display device 65 displays a numerical value corresponding to the number of extra games as “+10”. In addition, in the extra effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Cucucucucuen!” With an electronic sound) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  Here, the setting process of the additional effect in step S1907 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2101, a process of grasping the number of added games is performed based on the added command received this time. In a succeeding step S2102, a notification timing lottery process is executed. The notification timing lottery process is a process of lottery at which timing in the game the extra effect is performed on the premise that an extra effect will be performed in the current game.

  The extra effect is set so that the execution timing differs according to the number of extra games. Specifically, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 47, the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel are arranged in the order of stop operation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R as the execution timing of the extra effect in the current game. Then, a stop time of the first reel, a stop operation of the second reel, and a stop operation time of the third reel are set. And the timing at which the stop ON operation that the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed among the stop operations of each reel is performed, the timing that the stop OFF operation that the end of the pressing operation is performed, Is set.

  Here, a supplementary explanation will be given of the operation modes of the stop switches 42 to 44. The stop switches 42 to 44 can be displaced from an initial position arranged on the near side to an operation position arranged on the far side. In the situation where it is arranged at the initial position, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are in the LOW state, and the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are operated by operating from the initial position to the operation position. Switch to HI signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop ON operation has been performed on the assumption that the pressing operation of stop switches 42 to 44 has been performed based on the detection signal being switched from the LOW signal to the HI signal.

  Further, the stop switches 42 to 44 are urged toward the initial position by a spring or the like. For this reason, if the operation force (pressing force) pushed toward the operation position is not applied by releasing the stop switches 42 to 44, the stop switches 42 to 44 are moved to the initial position by the biasing force of the spring or the like. Return to. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal. Then, main controller 101 recognizes that a stop OFF operation has been performed on the basis that the pressing operation of stop switches 42 to 44 has been completed based on the detection signal being switched from the HI signal to the LOW signal.

  The extra effect is set so that the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44 can be generated either during the stop ON operation or during the stop OFF operation. That is, in a game in which an extra effect is generated, the extra effect can be generated not only at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed, but also at the timing when the pressing operation is finished.

  In the execution timing table of the extra effect, the timing at which the first reel stop ON operation is performed is selected as 50% when, for example, an extra game of 5 to 10 games occurs as a relatively small number of extra games. The timing at which the first reel stop OFF operation is performed is 5%, the second reel stop ON operation is 20%, the second reel stop OFF operation is 5%, the third reel stop ON operation is 10%, The third reel stop-off operation (when all reels are stopped) is selected at 10%. In this case, it is easier to select each reel at the time of stop-on operation than at the time of stop-off operation.

  On the other hand, when the number of added games is relatively large, for example, when an increase of 100 games or more occurs, the timing at which the first reel stop ON operation is performed is selected at 5%, and the first reel stop OFF operation is selected. Is performed at 20%, second reel stop ON operation is 10%, second reel stop OFF operation is 35%, third reel stop ON operation is 10%, third reel stop OFF operation ( (When all reels are stopped), 20% is selected. In this case, the reel OFF operation is easier to select than the stop ON operation.

  In other words, in this embodiment, it is easier to generate an additional effect for a larger number of games when an additional effect is generated at the time of stop OFF operation than when an additional effect is generated at the time of stop ON operation of each reel. Is set. In addition, when comparing the first to third reels, it is easy to select the number of games with the largest number of stop operations (ON operation, OFF operation) of the second reel, and the games with the second largest number of stop operations with the third reel are selected. It is set so that it is easy to select the game number that is the smallest when the first reel is stopped.

  Thus, since the number of additional games to be notified varies depending on the stop order, the expectation for the additional effect can be varied for each stop operation. For example, at the time of a stop operation in which a large number of additional effects are likely to occur, it can be expected that the effect will occur. Specifically, at the time of the second reel stop operation, in particular, the second reel stop OFF operation. Sometimes it can be expected. In this case, for example, as a player who expects an extra effect during the stop-off operation of the second reel, he / she wishes to calm down once and generate an extra effect before the stop-off operation of the second reel. However, it is considered that the second reel is stopped and turned off.

  In other words, if there is a possibility that a notification that it is advantageous for the player when a predetermined operation is performed, the player temporarily interrupts the game before the predetermined operation because of the expectation for the notification. In some cases, the predetermined operation is performed after the storage time is set and the storage time is fully enjoyed. By doing in this way, it is because the alerting | reporting can be fully enjoyed rather than the alerting | reporting which becomes the said advantageous without performing preparations. In this regard, as described above, by increasing the expectation at the time of the second reel stop OFF operation, a storage time is created before the second reel stop OFF operation, that is, at the time of the second reel stop ON operation. It becomes easy. Thus, it becomes easy to make a saving time in the middle of the stop operation in relation to the notification timing of the obtained privilege.

  Returning to the description of the setting process of the extra effect, after performing the notification timing lottery process in step S2102, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the lottery result in step S2102 is when any of the reels is stopped ON. judge. If it is at the time of stop ON, in step S2104, the target reel that generates the additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to be generated when the target reel is stopped ON. Specifically, a process for setting any of the first reel stop ON operation flag to the third reel stop ON operation flag in the various flag storage areas 84b is performed. These flags are flags for the CPU 82 to grasp the timing of generating the extra effect. In step S2104, the effect data of the extra effect corresponding to the number of extra games generated at the time of the stop ON operation is read from the effect data storage area, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area. Do. When the CPU 82 grasps that an extra effect is generated at the timing corresponding to the stop ON operation time flag, the CPU 82 reads the effect data temporarily stored in the effect data setting area so that the extra effect is performed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2103, it is determined in step S2105 whether or not the first reel or the second reel has been turned OFF. If it is during the stop-off operation of these reels, in step S2106, a target reel that generates an extra effect is set, and an additional effect is generated when the stop-off operation of the target reel is performed. Specifically, a process of setting either the first reel stop OFF operation time flag or the second reel stop OFF operation time flag in the various flag storage areas 84b is performed. These flags are also flags for the CPU 82 to grasp the timing of occurrence of the added effect. Also in step S2106, the effect data of the added effect corresponding to the number of added games is read from the effect data storage area, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2105, in step S2107, the current addition effect is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the third reel is stopped OFF). Specifically, processing for setting a flag at the time of third reel stop OFF operation is performed in the various flag storage areas 84b. Also in step S2107, temporary storage processing of effect data for an extra effect corresponding to the number of extra games is performed. After executing the process of step S2104, step S2106, or step S2107, the setting process for the added effect is ended.

  Returning to the description of the start-time effect setting process, if no additional command is received in step S1906, or after executing the process of step S1907, a bonus notification process is executed in step S1908, and in step S1909. The continuous effect setting process is executed, and thereafter, in step S1910, other start effects are set, and then the start effect setting process is terminated. The bonus notification process and the continuous performance setting process will be described later in detail. In the process of step S1910, for example, an effect suggesting a lottery result is set in correspondence with the start of the game, or a lamp around the start lever 41 is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Direction setting process during each stop operation>
Next, each stop operation effect setting process executed in step S1708 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2201, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. The stop ON operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 is performed among the stop operations of each reel.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2202, and it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs at the time of reel stop ON operation is set as an effect of the current game. If it is not set, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is set, it is determined in step S2203 whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is a stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect at the time of the set stop ON operation. If the target reel is not a stop-ON operation, the present setting process is terminated as it is. If it is a stop-on operation of the target reel, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, etc. are controlled so that a stop-on-operation effect is performed in step S2204, and then this setting process ends.

  For example, when an extra effect is set as the current stop ON operation effect, as shown in FIG. 49A, the liquid crystal display device 65 is displayed at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation). An extra effect occurs. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  Also, for example, if the current game is a push order winning selection and a push order notification effect is set, the corresponding reel is stopped based on each stop ON operation, so that the push order notification effect is the next operation target. It changes to the production showing the reel. Specifically, if all the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating before the effect at the time of the stop ON operation, a display for the first reel shown in FIG. . Then, when the corresponding reel (the middle reel 32M in the figure) is stopped by the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the reel to be operated next (the right reel 32R in the figure) shown in FIG. 36B is shown. Changes to production. In addition, if the two reels are rotating before the stop ON operation effect, the second reel shown in FIG. 36B is displayed as a stop target, and the second operation is performed by the stop ON operation. Based on the fact that the reel is stopped, the display changes to the display in which the third reel is to be stopped (FIG. 36C).

  If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2205, and it is determined whether or not each stop operation time command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. The stop OFF operation command is a command that is output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 among the stop operations of each reel is completed.

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the process proceeds to step S2206, and it is determined whether or not an effect generated at the time of reel stop OFF operation is set as an effect of the current game. If it is not set, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is set, in step S2207, it is determined whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is a stop operation of the reel that is the target of the effect during the set stop OFF operation. If it is not a stop-off operation of the target reel, this setting process is terminated as it is. If it is a stop-off operation of the target reel, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, and the like are controlled so that an effect at the time of the stop-off operation is performed in step S2208, and then this setting process is ended.

  For example, when an additional effect is set as an effect at the time of this stop OFF operation, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the stop switch 42 to 44 is terminated and the stop switch 42 to 44 is used. When the hand is released, the liquid crystal display device 65 adds an effect. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2205, each stop operation time effect setting process is terminated.

<All stop production setting process>
Next, the all-stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2301, it is determined whether or not a challenge mode end command is included as a stop command received this time. If the challenge mode end command is included, in step S2302, the display control device 201, the sound source IC 85, and the like are controlled so that the challenge mode end effect is performed. In the challenge mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays characters “end of challenge mode”. In addition, in the challenge mode end effect, a sound effect corresponding to the end of the challenge mode (for example, a man's daring voice, “Make more progress!”) Is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  If the challenge mode end command is not included in step S2301, it is determined in step S2303 whether an attack mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If an attack mode start command is included, processing for setting an attack mode start effect is performed in step S2304. In the attack mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays characters "Attack mode! Ver.1". In addition, in the attack mode start effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, “attack mode start!” With a female high voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  Incidentally, the display of “Ver. 1” in the attack mode start effect corresponds to the rank of the attack mode. That is, the display indicates that the attack mode started this time is the first attack mode. When the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the second attack mode (when a promotion command is received), the character display “Attack mode! Ver. 2” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 65 as a promotion effect. When the rank of the attack mode is promoted to the third attack mode, the text “Attack mode! Ver.3” is displayed. When the rank is promoted to the fourth attack mode, the letters “Attack mode! Ver.4” are displayed. Display is performed.

  If an attack mode start command is not included in step S2303, it is determined in step S2305 whether or not an attack mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. If an attack mode end command is included, processing for setting an attack mode end effect is performed in step S2306. In the attack mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the characters “Attack mode END” and includes the current attack mode (including the VB mode and the special zone). ) And the total number of payouts in the current attack mode (including the VB mode, specialized zone, and bonus). In addition, in the attack mode end effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, “seeking” in a female high voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  If the attack mode end command is not included in step S2305, it is determined in step S2307 whether or not the VB mode start command is included as the currently received stop command. If a VB mode start command is included, in step S2308, processing for setting a VB mode start effect is performed. In the VB mode start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57A, the liquid crystal display device 65 displays characters “777 Victory!”. In addition, in the VB mode start effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Victory bonus start” with male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  If the VB mode start command is not included in step S2307, it is determined in step S2311 whether or not the VB mode end command is included as the currently received stop command. If a VB mode end command is included, in step S2312, processing for setting a VB mode end effect is performed. In the VB mode end effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 57 (b), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the characters “PICTURE BONUS END” and the number of continued games in the attack mode at the end of the current VB mode. The number of continued games (including the VB mode and the special zone) is displayed, and the total payout number of the attack mode (including the VB mode, the special zone and the bonus) at the end of the current VB mode is displayed. In addition, in the VB mode end effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, “it will continue still” with male and female voices) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  If the VB mode end command is not included in step S2311, it is determined in step S2313 whether the specialized zone start command is included as the currently received stop command. If a specialized zone start command is included, processing for setting a specialized zone start effect is performed in step S2314. In the special zone start effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (a), the liquid crystal display device 65 displays a character “addition challenge !!” and a special mode in which an attack mode is likely to occur. The character that suggests is displayed. In addition, in the special zone start effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, “going” with a boy's voice) is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  If a special zone start command is not included in step S2313, it is determined in step S2315 whether a special zone end command is included as the currently received stop command. If the special zone end command is included, in step S2316, processing for setting a special zone end effect is performed. In the special zone end effect, for example, the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the total number of games added in the current special zone. In addition, in the special zone end effect, a corresponding sound effect (for example, “Cucucucucucuen!” With an electronic sound) is emitted from the speaker device 64. Note that the display content of the liquid crystal display device 65 and the sound effect emitted from the speaker device 64 may be varied according to the total number of games to be added.

  If the special zone end command is not included in step S2315, it is determined in step S2317 whether or not a bonus end command is included as the currently received stop command. If a bonus end command is included, processing for setting a bonus end effect is performed in step S2318. In the bonus end effect, for example, the liquid crystal display device 65 displays the total number of payouts acquired during the current bonus, and if the bonus has shifted to the attack mode, VB mode, or specialized zone, the attack mode ( The total number of payouts (including VB mode, specialized zone, bonus) is displayed. In addition, in the bonus end effect, an effect is given by a character or the like that suggests these contents according to whether the attack mode is successful, whether the challenge mode is successful, and the number of added games.

  After executing any of the processes of step S2302, step S2304, step S2306, step S2308, step S2312, step S2314, step S2316, and step S2318, or after making a negative determination in step S2315, the process proceeds to step S2309 and step S2319. move on. In steps S2309 and S2319, the display control device 201 and the sound source IC 85 are controlled to execute the additional effect when the additional effect is set. As already described, the setting of the extra effect is performed in step S1907 in the start effect setting process. Specifically, in the setting process of the added effect (FIG. 46), when the generation timing of this added effect is set at the time of all stoppages, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), all the reels 32L and 32M are set. , 32R is stopped at the timing when the liquid crystal display device 65 adds an effect. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  Thereafter, in step S2310 and step S2320, other stop-time effects are set, and then the effect setting process ends. In step S2310 and step S2320, for example, the sound source IC 85 is controlled so that the upper lamp 63 is turned on with a color corresponding to the winning combination, or a sound effect corresponding to the number of winning combinations is emitted from the speaker device 64. Or the sound source IC 85 is controlled such that a sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet at the time of replay is emitted from the speaker device 64.

  As described above, on the basis of various commands from the main control device 101, various processes for notifying the transition of the display mode are performed on the sub-control device 81 side, and the notification is performed by the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like. In addition, on the side of the sub control device 81, in addition to the notification of the transition of the display mode, processing for effects during various games is performed.

<Processing for production during various games>
In the present embodiment, continuous effects and bonus effects are provided as effects during various games. The continuous performance is an effect that expects a result advantageous to the player (a bonus, an attack mode, a challenge mode, a VB mode, etc.), and is a game that is performed a plurality of times (four times in this embodiment). It is an effect that can be continued over a period of time, and is an effect in which notification is made as to whether or not the advantageous result has been obtained in the final game. The bonus effect is an effect performed in each game in the bonus state that shifts based on the first BB or the second BB winning.

  The outline of the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 59 (a), at the start of the first game for which a continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of times of continuous effect is displayed (in the figure, four stages are associated with the four game continuous effects). Shows a nodama drop production). Then, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is provided to notify the presence / absence of continuation of the continuous effect (in the figure, the effect that the first stage daruma drop has been successful is shown, Indicating that the continuous production will continue). When the continuous effect is interrupted, at the end of the first game in which the continuous effect is set, an effect is provided to notify that the continuous effect ends in the middle (for example, an effect in which the first stage drama drop fails) ). The effects relating to the continuation of the continuous effects are the same for each game in the continuous effects.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (b), at the start of the second game in which a continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining three stages of daruma drop effects). Then, at the end of the second game, an effect is provided to notify the presence / absence of the continuation of the continuous production (in the figure, the production of the second stage daruma drop is shown, and the continuous production continues. Is shown).

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c), at the start of the third game in which the continuous effect is set, a display suggesting the number of remaining continuous effects is displayed (in the figure, the remaining two stages of the daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the third game, an effect that informs whether or not the continuous effect is continued is shown (in the figure, the effect that the third stage daruma drop has been successful is shown, and the continuous effect continues. Is shown).

  As shown in FIG. 59 (d), at the start of the final game (fourth game) of the continuous effect, a display suggesting that it is the final game of the continuous effect is displayed (in the figure, a one-stage daruma drop effect). Then, at the end of the final game, an effect is made as to whether or not the result is advantageous to the player (the drawing shows an effect that the last stage daruma drop was successful).

  As described above, in the continuous production, the production of the next game is set by taking over the production of the previous game, and the production of each game has continuity. In addition, it is possible to clearly recognize how many games the current game is from the start of the continuous production (how many games are there until the end of the continuous production).

  Here, in each continuous effect game, whether or not the continuous effect continues until the next game is set such that the continuation rate increases as the continuous effect game progresses. That is, at the end of the first game of the continuous effect, the possibility of being notified of the discontinuation of the continuous effect is the highest, and as the game progresses, the possibility of notifying the discontinuation becomes lower. Therefore, in the continuous production, the level of interest of the player is greatly different depending on how many games the current game is in the continuous production, and the high interest is drawn as the game progresses from the start game to the end game. .

  The setting of the continuous effect is performed in the specific combination notification process (step S1905), the bonus notification process (step S1908) and the continuous effect setting process (step S1909) in the start effect setting process (FIG. 44). Therefore, each process will be described in order below.

<Bonus notification process>
First, the bonus notification process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In the bonus notification process, first, in step S2401, it is determined based on the lottery result command received this time whether or not the game to be started is a bonus winning game. If it is a bonus winning game, in step S2402, a notification game lottery process for notifying bonus winning is executed. In the notification game lottery process, the number of games after which a bonus winning notification is notified is determined by lottery. Specifically, one notification game is determined from 0 games (notified in this game) to 10 games. In addition, in the lottery of the notification game, the notification game may be different depending on the winning combination (whether or not it is a duplicate winning or the type of a small combination that is duplicated if it is a duplicate winning). For example, when a bonus is won by strong cherry overlap, a small number of games may be easily selected, and when a bonus is won by weak cherry overlap, a large number of games may be easily selected.

  In subsequent step S2403, processing for setting the number of continuous effect games is performed based on the notification game determined by the processing in step S2402. Specifically, in step S2403, a continuous effect game is set in the continuous effect counter provided in the various counter areas 84c. The continuous performance counter is a counter for grasping the number of games until the result notification, and is decremented by 1 for each game. For example, in a configuration in which four games are continuously produced, a continuous production is started in a game in which the continuous production counter is 4, and a result is notified in a game in which the continuous production counter is 0. More specifically, for example, if it is determined in step S2402 that a bonus winning notification is to be made after 10 games, 10 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2403. In this case, the continuous effect is started from a game whose continuous effect counter is 4. If it is determined in step S2402 that the bonus winning notification is to be made after 5 games, 5 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2403. Even in this case, the continuous effect is started from a game whose continuous effect counter is 4.

  Note that, when an informing game of less than 4 games is set in step S2402, a continuous effect is started from the middle. For example, if it is determined in step S2402 that a bonus winning notification is to be made after two games, 2 is input to the continuous effect counter in step S2403. In this case, the continuous effect is started from the current game, and is performed from the effect of the third continuous effect in FIG. 59 (c).

  After executing the processing in step S2403, in step S2404, a continuous effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 84b. The continuous effect flag is a flag for the CPU 82 to grasp that the continuous effect is being executed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2401, or after executing the process of step S2404, the process proceeds to step S2405. In step S2405, it is determined whether or not a bonus game is started from the current game. The bonus game corresponds to a game from the next game winning the first BB or the second BB to the end of the bonus. The case where an affirmative determination is made in step S2405 is a case where the first BB or the second BB winning is established in the previous game. In this case, in step S2406, the number of bonus effect games is set in the bonus effect counter in the various counter areas 84c in the RAM 84. The bonus effect counter is a counter for executing an effect set for each game in accordance with the progress of the bonus game, and an effect corresponding to the counter is performed by the liquid crystal display device 65 or the like.

  As already described, in the present embodiment, in the 1BB or 2BB bonus game, a winning combination in which 9 medals are paid out every game is won, and the bonus ends when 216 medals are paid out. In other words, the bonus game of the first BB or the second BB ends with 24 games. The effects in the bonus game are set so as to be executed over 24 games, and the above-described bonus effect counter is a counter for grasping which game effect of the 24 games should be performed. It is. In step S2406, 24 is set in the bonus effect counter as the number of bonus effect games, and the bonus effect counter is subtracted in each game of the bonus game. After performing the process of step S2406, in step S2407, the bonus effect flag is set in the various flag storage areas 84b. The bonus effect flag is a flag for the CPU 82 to grasp that the bonus effect is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S2405, or after the process of step S2407 is executed, the bonus notification process is terminated.

<Specific role notification process>
Next, the specific combination notification process executed in step S1905 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  First, in step S2501, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included as the current start command. If no precursor command is included, it is determined in step S2502 whether an additional command is included as the current start command. If no additional command is included, it is determined in step S2503 whether a bonus has been won. If you have not won the bonus, that is, if you have won the specified role as the lottery result, you have not won the lottery to enter the challenge mode, attack mode, VB mode and the number of continuous games, If the bonus has not been won, lottery processing in the pseudo precursor mode is executed in step S2504. While the pseudo precursor mode is visually difficult to distinguish from the precursor mode, in the precursor mode, an advantageous result (winning of the challenge mode, etc.) is notified to the player based on the end of the number of precursor games, The pseudo precursor mode is a mode that ends without notifying a result advantageous to the player based on the end of the number of pseudo precursor games.

  In step S2504, a pseudo sign mode lottery table is acquired from the various table storage areas of the ROM 83, and a lottery counter is acquired from the various counter areas 84c to determine whether to execute the pseudo predictor mode. . The table for the pseudo-signature mode lottery is set so that the probability of winning the pseudo-predictor mode lottery varies depending on the type of the specific role that has been won. For example, the strong cherry is simulated more than the weak cherry The probability of winning the lottery in the sign mode is set to be high.

  In step S2505, based on the processing result in step S2504, it is determined whether or not the lottery in the pseudo precursor mode has been won. If the game is won, a lottery process for the number of games in the pseudo precursor mode is performed in step S2506. This process corresponds to step S808 on the main control apparatus 101 side, and the number of pseudo precursor games among 1 to 32 is randomly determined by lottery. In a succeeding step S2507, a process of setting the number of pseudo precursor games determined in the step S2506 in a continuous effect counter is performed. In the present embodiment, when the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode is set, the precursor mode or the pseudo precursor mode ends after the continuous performance. Then, by inputting the number of pseudo-predictor games to the continuous effect counter in step S2507, the continuous effect is started when the remaining number of games in the pseudo-signature mode corresponds to the start of the continuous effect (the remaining four games). It will be.

  In step S2508, a process of setting a pseudo flag indicating the pseudo precursor mode in the various flag storage areas 84b is executed. In a succeeding step S2509, a continuous effect flag is set. Thereafter, the specific combination notification process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in any of steps S2501 to S2503, or if a negative determination is made in step S2505, the specific combination notification process is terminated.

<Continuous production setting process>
Next, the continuous effect setting process performed in step S1909 of the start effect setting process (FIG. 44) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In step S2601, it is determined whether or not a precursor command is included as a start command received this time. If a precursor command is included, in step S2602, the number of precursor games in the precursor mode included in the precursor command is input to the continuous effect counter. As a result, when the number of remaining games in the sign mode becomes the one corresponding to the start of the continuous performance (the remaining 4 games), the continuous performance is started. In subsequent step S2603, a continuous effect flag is set.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2601, or after executing the processing of step S2603, the process proceeds to step S2604. In step S2604, it is determined whether the continuous performance flag is set. If the continuous effect flag is set, a process of subtracting 1 from the continuous effect counter is performed in step S2605. In step S2606, it is determined whether the continuous effect counter is a number (0 to 3) corresponding to the continuous effect. If the continuous effect counter is a number corresponding to the continuous effect, it is determined in step S2607 whether or not the pseudo flag is set. If the pseudo flag is not set, the process advances to step S2608 to acquire the effect data table for the present sign from the effect data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83. In step S2609, the corresponding effect data of the continuous effect is specified from the effect data table for the sign and the continuous effect counter, and processing for setting the current continuous effect is performed. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect data table for this sign, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data indicates that the continuous effect continues until the next game. If the counter is 0, the production data indicates that the current continuous production ends successfully.

  If it is determined in step S2607 that the pseudo flag is set, the process proceeds to step S2610. In step S2610, the effect data table for pseudo precursors is acquired from the effect data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83. Then, in step S2611, the corresponding continuous production effect data is specified from the pseudo-prediction production data table and the continuous production counter, and processing for setting the current continuous production is performed. As the effect data of the continuous effect specified from the effect data table for the pseudo precursor, if the continuous effect counter is 1 to 3, the effect data indicating that the continuous effect continues until the next game, or the effect indicating that the effect is not continued. If the continuous production counter is 0, it is production data indicating that the current continuous production ends due to failure.

  In addition, when the continuous production counter is 1 to 3, the production data specified from the pseudo-signature production table includes those for which no continuous production is set. For example, when the continuous effect counter is 3 and 2, continuous effect data is not set, and when the continuous effect counter is 1, the continuous effect indicates that the continuous effect continues until the next game in FIG. When the effect data for the first effect is set and the continuous effect counter is 0, the effect data for the second effect of the continuous effect indicating that the continuous effect is not continued until the next game in FIG. 59B is set. By doing in this way, it is possible to set an effect in which a continuous effect is interrupted in the middle of a game in which the number of pseudo precursor games in the pseudo precursor mode is zero.

  After performing the process of step S2609 or step S2611, it is determined in step S2612 whether the continuous effect counter is 0 or not. If the continuous effect counter is 0, processing for clearing the continuous effect flag and the pseudo flag is performed in step S2613. When the pseudo flag is not set, the state is maintained. When a negative determination is made in step S2606 or step S2612, or after the process of step S2613 is performed, the continuous effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S2604 that the continuous performance flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S2614. In step S2614, it is determined whether the bonus effect flag is set. If it has been set, a bonus bonus counter is subtracted in step S2615. Specifically, a process of subtracting 1 from the bonus effect counter is performed. In subsequent step S2616, an effect data table for bonus is obtained from effect data table storage area 83a. Then, in step S2617, corresponding bonus effect data is specified from the bonus effect data table and the bonus effect counter, and processing for setting the current bonus effect is performed. In step S2618, it is determined whether or not the bonus effect counter is zero. If the bonus effect counter is 0, processing for clearing the bonus effect flag is performed in step S2619. Then, this continuous effect setting process is complete | finished.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, the lottery process on the main controller 101 side is performed based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R When the rotation is started and the reels 32L, 32M, 32R are stopped based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the combination of symbols stopped on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, it corresponds. In the configuration in which a privilege is given, a plurality of RT states having different replay probabilities as a result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state shifts when a corresponding promotion replay or fall replay winning is established. Whether or not the corresponding replay can be won is determined by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 in addition to the result of the success / failure lottery, and the notification of the operation order is performed according to the result of the lottery process. It is done by winning the lottery. As a result of the lottery process, a push order bell is provided, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, the push order bell winning can be established and a medal can be obtained. Then, the game state in which the replay probability is improved is changed to the second RT state or the third RT state, and the display mode in which the operation order is notified is changed, so that the replay probability is improved in the RT state. A sequential bell prize can be established, and a large amount of medals can be obtained.

<Production data setting process>
Next, the effect data setting process in the effect setting process (FIG. 42) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the effect data setting process, the effects set in steps S1701 to S1710 are performed as display effects in the display control device 201 (liquid crystal display device 65), and as sound effects in the sound source IC 85. It is a process for making it perform.

  That is, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not an effect has been set in each process of steps S1701 to S1710. More specifically, in the bet effect setting process in step S1704, the start effect setting process in step S1706, each stop operation effect setting process in step S1708, the all stop effect setting process in step S1710, and other processes in step S1711. It is determined whether or not any one of the various effect setting processes has been performed. If any effect setting process is performed, the display data setting process is executed in step S2702. The display data setting process is a process for causing the display control apparatus 201 to perform a display effect. In a succeeding step S2703, a sound data setting process is executed. The sound data setting process is a process for causing a sound effect to be performed by the sound source IC 85.

  When a negative determination is made in step S2701, or after the process of step S2703 is executed, the effect data setting process ends.

  Hereinafter, the display data setting process and the sound data setting process will be described.

<Display data setting process>
As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 61, in the display data setting process, first, in step S2801, the effects set in the processes of steps S1701 to S1710 are grasped, and address information corresponding to the grasped effects is specified. Execute the process. Specifically, the effect data table is acquired from the effect data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83, and the address information of the effect command corresponding to the effect set this time is specified.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the effect data table, the effect number (effect contents), the effect command to the display control apparatus 201, and the command address information indicating the storage location of the effect command are in one-to-one correspondence. It is stored in association with each other. Therefore, an effect command to be output to the display control device 201 is specified by specifying address information in the effect data table based on the effect content set this time.

  For example, when the challenge mode start effect (step S1802) is set in the betting time effect setting process, in step S2801, the effect number of the challenge mode start effect is grasped from the effect data table and corresponds to the effect number. Specify the command address information to be used. If the continuous effect is set in the start effect setting process, in step S2801, the effect number of the continuous effect corresponding to the value of the current continuous effect counter is obtained from the effect data table, and the effect number is supported. Specify the command address information to be used. When the display mode setting process is performed in the start time effect setting process and the display mode effect is set, in step S2801, the effect number of the current display mode effect is obtained from the effect data table. Then, the command address information corresponding to the production number is specified.

  In a succeeding step S2802, a process for obtaining an effect command is executed based on the address information specified in the step S2801. Specifically, based on the command address information specified in step S2801, a process of acquiring the effect command from the corresponding address in the effect command storage area 83d of the ROM 83 is executed. In step S2803, an effect command is output to the display control apparatus 201, and then the display data setting process ends.

  In other words, the display data setting process is executed at the timing when various effects are set as one of the periodic processes (effect setting processes) that are periodically started (2 msec) by the sub-control device 81, and the display data setting is performed. The effect command set in the process is also output to the display control device 201 at the timing when various effects are set in the periodic process.

<V interrupt processing of display control device 201>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the CPU 202 in the display control apparatus 201 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The V interrupt process is a process executed when the CPU 202 detects a V interrupt signal. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 205 to the CPU 202. When the image signal for one frame is output to the liquid crystal display device 65, the VDP 205 starts outputting the image signal from the dot in the upper left corner of the display screen and arranges the image signal on a horizontal line including the dot at one end. The image signal is sequentially output to the dots, and the image signal is output from the left to the right dot in order from the top for each horizontal line. Then, an image signal is finally output for the dots in the lower right corner of the display screen. In this case, the VDP 205 outputs a V interrupt signal to the CPU 202 at the timing when the image signal is output for the last dot, and causes the CPU 202 to recognize that the update of one frame image has been completed. The output period of this V interrupt signal is 1/30 sec (about 33.3 msec). In this regard, the V interrupt processing can be regarded as being started in synchronization with reception of the V interrupt signal.

  Here, in addition to the V interrupt process, the CPU 202 executes a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, and a command interrupt process that is executed when a command is received from the sub-control device 81. Although detailed description of the main process and the command interrupt process is omitted, the effect command output from the sub-control device 81 is stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process.

  In the V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 62, it is first determined in step S2901 whether a new command has been received. Specifically, in the display data setting process, an effect command is output from the sub-control device 81 by performing an effect command output process, and the effect command is stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process. Determine whether. If an effect command is stored, data table selection processing is executed in step S2902. The data table is an information group in which processing necessary for displaying an image for one frame at each update timing when a moving image corresponding to a received command is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65. is there.

  Incidentally, while the output of the production command on the sub-control device 81 side is performed at a cycle of 2 msec, the V interrupt processing is performed at a cycle of about 33.3 msec, a plurality of times during the cycle of one V interrupt processing. A production command may be output. In this case, in step S2901 and step S2902, determination of presence / absence of a command and data table selection processing are performed for all commands stored in the command storage area.

  As shown in FIG. 62, in the data table, an image data group corresponding to an effect command set on the sub-control device 81 side is set. For example, when the production command C1 corresponding to the production number 1 is received, the number of frames is p (p is a natural number), and Da (1) to Da (p) are used as usage data. The data table to be selected is selected. When the production command Cx corresponding to the production number x (x is a natural number) is received, the number of frames is s (s is a natural number), and the usage data is Dx (1) to Dx. The data table in which (s) is used is selected.

  If a negative determination is made in step S2901, or after the processing of step S2902 is executed, the process proceeds to step S2903. In step S2903, pointer update processing is executed. In the pointer update process, the pointer information set in the data table is updated to advance by one frame. As a result, the CPU 202 can grasp the processing necessary to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing.

  In a succeeding step S2904, task processing is executed. In the task processing, in order to display an image for one frame corresponding to the current update timing, the type of image data necessary for instructing the drawing to the VDP 205 and the parameters applied to the grasped image data are determined. Perform the operation.

  Thereafter, the drawing list output process is executed in step S2905, and then the V interrupt process is terminated. In the drawing list output process, a drawing list for displaying an image of one frame corresponding to the update timing related to the current processing time is created, and the created drawing list is transmitted to the VDP 205. In this case, in the drawing list, the image data grasped in the immediately preceding task process is set as a drawing target in the video RAM 207, and the parameter information updated in the task process is set together. In the VDP 205, necessary image data is read from the character ROM 206 in accordance with the drawing list, and set in the frame buffer of the video RAM 207 with the parameters applied to the read image data. Thereby, drawing data for one frame is created. Then, an image signal is output to the liquid crystal display device 65 in accordance with the created drawing data, whereby an image for one frame is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65.

  For example, in FIG. 62, the data table corresponding to the production number 2 is selected, and the display is performed using the data of Db (q-5) as the F (q-5) -th frame image. In this case, the use data number is updated by one frame by performing the pointer update process in step S2903. Then, by the task processing in step S2904, the data of Db (q-4) is grasped and the parameter applied to the grasped data is calculated. Thereafter, a drawing list for Db (q-4) data is created and sent to the VDP 205 by the drawing list output processing in step S2905. As a result, the F (q-4) -th frame image is displayed on the display screen.

  As described above, the display screen image of the liquid crystal display device 65 is updated by one frame every time the V interrupt process is started in the display control device 201 at a cycle of about 33.3 msec. That is, the display effect set as the display data setting process in the effect data setting process of the sub-control device 81 is updated at a cycle of about 33.3 msec in the display control device 201 (liquid crystal display device 65).

<Sound data setting process>
Next, the sound data setting process executed in step S2703 in the effect data setting process (FIG. 60) of the sub-control device 81 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The sound data setting process is a process for performing a sound effect in accordance with the display effect set in the immediately preceding display data setting process.

  As already described, in the present embodiment, the speaker device 64 that performs sound effects includes a plurality of sound source ICs 85, amplifiers 86, and individual speakers 87, and each sound source IC 85 passes through the corresponding amplifiers 86 and individual speakers 87. To control sound generation and output. The sound data setting process is a process for instructing the sound source IC 85 to output sound data to be output in the current sound effect. After the sound data is instructed to the sound source IC 85 by the sound data setting process, the sound source IC 85 generates and outputs sound based on the instructed data.

  The sound generation processing in which sound generation / output update by the sound source IC 85 is described in detail later. The sound source IC 85 performs the sound generation processing at a cycle shorter than the update cycle for one frame in the display control apparatus 201. It is configured to perform at a certain 10 msec cycle. In this case, the update cycle for one frame on the display control device 201 side and the update cycle on the sound source IC 85 side are in a relationship of periods that are not divisible by each other, and the generation of the sound effect and the update timing of the display effect Deviation may occur.

  More specifically, for example, when a predetermined sound effect is to be started in the second frame among effects for a predetermined frame, the start timing of the predetermined sound effect is set as the update timing of the sound source IC 85, After about 33.3 msec which is the update timing of the second frame, a deviation of about 3.3 msec (about 33.3 msec−10 msec × 3) from the update timing of the sound source IC 85 occurs. In addition, when the predetermined sound effect is to be started in the third frame among the effects for the predetermined frame, if the start timing of the predetermined sound effect is the update timing of the sound source IC 85, the third frame After the update timing of about 66.6 msec, there is a difference between the update timing of the sound source IC 85 and about 6.6 msec (about 66.6 msec-10 msec × 6) or about 3.4 msec (10 msec × 7−about 66.6 msec). Will occur.

  That is, in the case of a configuration in which the sound effect is set by the update data for each sound generation process of the sound source IC 85, a shift occurs even if the start timing of the sound effect is matched with the frame update timing. In this case, for example, a sound effect corresponding to the updated frame is slightly delayed from the frame update timing, or a sound effect corresponding to the updated frame is generated slightly earlier than the frame update timing. Will be. Such a deviation may ruin the special effects.

  In particular, as described above, the present embodiment is a game that aims to acquire a large number of medals by changing the display mode as well as changing the game state. It can be said that it has been sent. In that respect, the configuration in which the content of the display effect is grasped by the sound effect before the display effect (for example, whether or not the lottery for the transition to the attack mode is won is recognized by the sound effect before the display effect) As a result, it is not only possible to fully expect the effect of the part of the game such as whether or not the display mode shifts, but also the effect of the part of the liver will be spoiled, The interest in game play in this embodiment will be greatly reduced.

  In view of this, in the sound data setting process in the present embodiment, a contrivance is made so as not to cause a deviation between the display effect and the sound effect.

  As shown in FIG. 64, in the sound data setting process, first, in step S3001, a process of grasping the contents of the current effect is executed. More specifically, a process for specifying the effect number specified in step S2801 of the display data setting process is executed as the contents of the current effect. In the subsequent step S3002, processing for grasping the value of the sound source counter K stored in the various counter areas 84c of the RAM 84 is performed. The sound source counter K is a counter for specifying the type of the sound source IC 85 for which sound data is set in the current process. The value of the sound source counter K corresponds to the number of the sound source IC 85, and in the processing after step S3003, sound data setting processing is performed for the sound source IC 85 corresponding to the sound source counter K grasped in step S3002.

  That is, in step S3003, the sound effect data table stored in the effect data table storage area 83a of the ROM 83 is read based on the effect number specified in step S3001, and sound generation is performed in the sound source IC 85 in the current process. A process of specifying a frame on the display control apparatus 201 side to start output (hereinafter referred to as a sound data generation frame) is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 65, the sound effect data table stores each sound source IC 85 and the sound data generation frame in association with each effect number. For example, in the production with the production number of 1, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame for the first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w. Therefore, in the production with the production number of No. 1, the sound generation / output is started in all the sound source ICs 85 at the start timing of the display production, and the sound production is started in all the sound source ICs 85. In the production with the production number 2, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame for the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c, while the fourth sound source IC 85d to the 23rd sound source IC 85w are The voice data generation frame is not set. Therefore, in the production with the production number of 2, the sound production is started by the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c at the start timing of the display production, and the other sound sources IC 85d to 85w are sounded in any frame. There is no directing. That is, the first and second effects have different types and numbers of sound source ICs 85 to be used, but the start timing of the sound effects is the same as the start timing of the display effects.

  On the other hand, in the production having the production number 3, for example, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame for the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c, and the sound data generation frame is the second for the fourth sound source IC 85d. A sound data generation frame is set as the third frame for the fifth sound source IC 85e. In addition, the sound data generation frame is set as the x-th frame for the sixth sound source IC 85f, and the sound data generation frame is set as the y-th frame for the 21st sound source IC 85v. For this reason, in the production with the production number 3, the sound production by the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c is started at the start timing of the display production, and at the update timing of the next frame (update timing to the second frame). The sound effect by the four sound source ICs 85d is started, and the sound effect by the fifth sound source IC 85e is started at the update timing of the next frame (update timing to the third frame). Also, the sound effect by the sixth sound source IC 85f is started at the update timing to the xth frame, and the sound effect by the 21st sound source IC 85v is started at the update timing to the yth frame. That is, in the third effect, the start timing of the display effect and the start timing of the sound effect may be different.

  In step S3003, for example, if the current production number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 1, it is determined that the sound data generation frame is 1 for the first sound source IC 85a. Further, for example, if the current production number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 4, it is understood that the sound data generation frame is 2 for the fourth sound source IC 85d.

  After grasping the sound data generation frame in step S3003, processing for grasping the sound data address after the sound data generation frame is performed in step S3004. In the sound effect data table, a sound data number corresponding to the content of the sound effect to be performed after the sound data generation frame is stored for each sound source IC 85. For example, in the No. 1 production, for the first sound source IC 85a, the audio production based on the No. a sound data is performed, the sound production based on the A + 1 No. sound data is performed, and then the a + 2, No. A + 3, The sound data number is stored as follows. Further, for the second sound source IC 85b, a sound effect is performed based on the b-th sound data, and then the sound data numbers are stored such as b + 1, b + 2, b + 3, and so on.

  The sound effect corresponding to each sound data number has a length of a predetermined period (for example, approximately 11.1 msec), and when the sound effect is performed by the first sound source IC 85a in the first effect, the predetermined period After the a-th sound effect is performed over a period of time, the a + 1-th sound effect is performed over a predetermined period, and the a + 2-th sound effect is performed over a predetermined period, followed by the a + 3 sound. As in the case of production, continuous sound generation / output is performed according to the set sound data number.

  The sound data number is for associating with the address information of the sound source data stored in the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83. The sound source data is data for generating and outputting sound by each sound source IC 85 being reproduced by sound generation processing, and is data for reproduction of music, sound, sound effects, and the like. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), a sound data table is stored in the sound data table storage area 83b of the ROM 83. The sound data table has a pair of sound data number and address information of sound source data. 1 and stored in association with each other. Each sound source IC 85 acquires the corresponding sound effect data from the sound source data storage area 83e shown in FIG. 66 (b) based on the sound source data address information. It becomes possible to do through. That is, the sound data numbers are set continuously as described above, and the sound source data is set in association with the sound data numbers, and the sound source IC 85 continuously acquires the sound source data for reproduction. The sound source data is reproduced (sound generation / output) according to the acquired order.

  Here, the sound source data storage area 83e stores volume information along with the sound source data. That is, in the sound source data storage area 83e, the output frequency as the sound source data (pitch, tone type, etc.) and the output volume as the volume information are stored as a set. The volume information is set to values from 1 to 139, and the output volume increases as the value increases. When each sound source IC 85 acquires sound source data based on the sound source data address information, it can also acquire volume information, and performs sound production at a corresponding volume.

  In step S3004, a sound data number after the sound data generation frame is acquired based on the sound effect data table, and processing for grasping sound source data address information from the sound data table is performed based on the acquired sound data number. .

  For example, in step S3004, if the current production number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 1, the c, c, c, a, a, a,. As the sound source data address information corresponding to, information such as A (c), A (c), A (c), A (a), A (a), is grasped. If the current production number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 4, the sound source corresponding to d, d, d, d, d, etc. for the fourth sound source IC 85d. As data address information, information such as A (d), A (d), A (d), A (d), A (d), and the like is grasped.

  In the subsequent step S3005, a process for grasping the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is performed. For example, if the production is No. 1 or No. 2, the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in each sound source IC 85 is zero. On the other hand, if the production is No. 3, the number of frames from the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c to the sound data generation frame is 0, but the number of frames to the sound data generation frame from the fourth sound source IC 85d is 1, the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in the fifth sound source IC 85e is 2, and the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame in the sixth sound source IC 85f is x-1.

  In subsequent step S3006, it is determined whether or not the number of frames grasped in step S3005 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number (in this embodiment, 150 frames, 5 sec). If it is less than the predetermined number, the process proceeds to step S3007.

  In step S3007, a process of grasping silence data addresses corresponding to the number of frames grasped in step S3005 is performed. As shown in FIG. 66A, silence data address information (B (x), B (y)) is set in the sound data table as a sound data address whose sound data number is x or y. Has been. Silence data is data (20 kHz in this embodiment) whose output frequency is equal to or lower than the identification lower limit value (20 Hz) or higher than the identification upper limit value (20 kHz) as sound source data, and is set to 0 as volume information. It is. The corresponding reproduction length differs between the xth silence data and the yth silence data, and the reproduction length of the xth silence data is set as a length of about one frame (about 33.3 msec). . On the other hand, the reproduction length of the y-th silence data is variable, and the length is set in a later process (step S3011).

  Here, when the sound source IC 85 performs sound production by reproducing sound source data having volume information of 1 or more, if the output frequency is sound source data having an identification lower limit value or higher and a lower limit of identification value set, the player Can grasp the sound. On the other hand, even if the sound source data whose volume information is 0 or the sound source data whose output frequency is lower than the identification lower limit value or higher than the identification upper limit value is reproduced, the player can grasp the sound. Can not.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, it is possible to set sound data for reproducing sound source data that outputs sounds that can be grasped by the player, and output sounds that the player cannot grasp or difficult to grasp. It is possible to set sound data for reproducing the sound source data. Sound data (sound data) in which sound source data that outputs sounds that can be grasped by the player is reproduced corresponds to normal information as sound information in the present embodiment, and the player cannot grasp or is difficult to grasp. Sound data (silence data) in which sound source data from which sound is output is reproduced corresponds to special information as sound information in the present embodiment.

  In step S3007, as silence data corresponding to the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame, processing is performed to grasp address information whose sound data number is x and whose sound data address information is B (x). Specifically, for example, when the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is 1, B (x) for one frame is grasped as sound data address information. When the number of frames is 3, B (x), B (x), and B (x) for three frames are grasped as sound data address information.

  In order to distinguish sound data address information corresponding to silence data from sound data address information corresponding to sound data different from the silence data, the former is referred to as a silence data address and the latter is also referred to as a sound data address. .

  In subsequent step S3008, the silence data address grasped in step S3007 and the sound data address grasped in step S3004 are set in the area corresponding to the current sound source counter K in the data output area 84a of the RAM 84. Process. That is, in the data output area 84a, the first area to the 23rd area are set corresponding to the number of sound source ICs 85, and each sound source IC 85 stores sound source data based on the data address set in the corresponding area. Sound source data and volume information are acquired from the area 83e.

  For example, if the current production number is No. 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 4, B (x) and B (x) for two frames are known as silence data addresses, and the voice data As addresses, A (e), A (e), A (e), etc. are known. In this case, in step S3008, B (x), B (x), A (e), A (e), A (e) are added to the fourth area corresponding to the value of the sound source counter K in the data output area 84a. Set information such as. If the current production number is 3 and the value of the sound source counter K is 22, the silent data address is not grasped, and the voiced data addresses are A (b), A (b), A ( b)... In this case, in step S3008, information such as A (b), A (b), A (b), etc. is set in the 22nd area corresponding to the value of the sound source counter K in the data output area 84a.

  If it is determined in step S3006 that the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is a predetermined number or more, the process proceeds to step S3009. In step S3009, processing for specifying the update timing (processing timing) of the sound source IC 85 immediately before the sound data generation frame is performed. For example, when the sound data generation frame is the 182th frame, the length of the period until it is updated to the sound data generation frame is 181 frames × about 33.3 msec = about 6.0333 sec. In this case, from the update cycle (10 msec) of the sound source IC 85, the update timing of the sound source IC 85 immediately before the sound data generation frame is 6.030 sec.

  In step S3010, a process of specifying the length from the update timing of the sound source IC 85 specified in step S3009 to the start timing of the voiced data generation frame (in the above example, about 3.3 msec) is performed. In step S3011, a process of grasping a silence data address corresponding to the length specified in step S3010 is performed. That is, the silence data address B (y) corresponding to the y-th silence data whose length can be set is grasped by the length specified in step S3010 (about 3.3 msec).

  In the subsequent step S3012, information on the update timing (start timing information) of the sound source IC 85 immediately before the sound data generation frame specified in step S3010, the silent data address grasped in step S3011, and grasped in step S3004. The voiced data address is set in the area corresponding to the current sound source counter K in the data output area 84a of the RAM 84.

  After executing the process of step S3008 or step S3012, the process proceeds to step S3013. In step S3013, the sound source counter K is incremented by one. In step S3014, it is determined whether the sound source counter K has reached the upper limit value of 24. If it is 24, in step S3015, a process of resetting the value of the sound source counter K to an initial value of 1 is performed, and then the sound data setting process is terminated. Thus, the next sound data setting process is performed from the sound data setting process corresponding to the first sound source IC 85a. If it is less than 24 in step S3014, it means that there is still an unset sound source IC 85. In this case, the process returns to step S3002 to repeat the process of setting the sound data of the corresponding sound source IC 85. .

  By the sound data setting process as described above, address information of sound data corresponding to the current effect is set in each area of the data output area 84a. Here, an example of the address information set in each area will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 shows a case where the production number is No. 3.

  For example, the first area corresponding to the first sound source IC 85a includes A (c), A (c), A (c), A (a), A (a), A (a), A (b), Address information such as A (b), A (b), and the like is stored. These address information are all sound data addresses, and the first sound source IC 85a performs the sound effect based on the sound data address from the start timing of the effect, that is, from the display start timing of the first frame in the display effect. Do.

  On the other hand, the fourth area corresponding to the fourth sound source IC 85d includes B (x), A (d), A (d), A (d), A (d), A (d), A (d), , And the like are stored. As already described, B (x) is a silent data address having a length of one frame. Therefore, in the fourth sound source IC 85d, sound is generated from the start timing of the production, but for one frame from the start timing, sound is generated based on silence data. Cannot grasp or difficult to grasp. Therefore, although the sound generation by the fourth sound source IC 85d is started from the display start timing of the first frame in the display effect, the player grasps as if the sound effect has started from the display start timing of the second frame. Is done.

  Similarly, address information such as B (x), B (x), A (e), A (e), A (e), and the like is stored in the fifth area corresponding to the fifth sound source IC 85e. . Therefore, although the fifth sound source IC 85e starts generating sound from the display start timing of the first frame in the display effect, the player grasps as if the sound effect has started from the display start timing of the third frame. The

  In the sixth area corresponding to the sixth sound source IC 85f, sound generation start timing information is stored together with address information such as B (y), A (c), and A (c) A (c). The sound source IC 85 starts sound generation from the start timing. Further, as already described, B (y) is a silent data address corresponding to the length of the start timing of the sound data generation frame and the update timing of the sound source IC 85 immediately before that. For this reason, in the sixth sound source IC 85f, although sound generation is started at a timing slightly earlier than the display start timing of the xth frame in the display effect, the player starts the sound effect from the display start timing of the xth frame. It is grasped as if it were.

<Sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85>
Next, sound generation processing executed by the sound source IC 85 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. Note that the sound generation process is a process executed individually by the first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w, and is based on the fact that new data is set in the data output area 84a by the sub control device 81. After that, it is executed at a predetermined cycle (10 msec cycle). That is, the sound generation process is a process activated periodically, and the start timing of the period is the execution of the sound data setting process by the sub-control device 81. In addition, when the sound data setting process is newly performed after the periodic sound generation process is started based on the sound data setting process being performed, the update period of the sound generation process is reset. The That is, when an opportunity to generate a new effect occurs, sound generation processing is started at a new cycle. In addition, the start cycle of the sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85 is longer than the start cycle (2 msec cycle) of the effect setting processing by the sub control device 81 and the start cycle of the V interrupt processing of the display control device 201 (33). .3 msec period).

  Here, the sound source IC 85 can access the RAM 84 in the sub-control device 81, and more specifically, can access the data output area 84 a of the RAM 84. Therefore, when sound data setting processing is performed in the sub-control device 81 and various data are set in the data output area 84a, the data is not output to the sound source IC 85 by a command or the like, but is set in that area. State is maintained. That is, the sub-control device 81 and the sound source IC 85 can exchange data via the data output area 84a, thereby simplifying the processing configuration.

  Furthermore, the sound source IC 85 can also access the ROM 83 of the sub-control device 81, and more specifically, can access the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83. Therefore, it is not necessary to output sound source data (and volume information) to the sound source IC 85 by a command or the like when the sound source IC 85 performs a sound effect, and the sound source IC 85 stores the sound source data (and volume information). There is no need. As a result, the processing configuration when performing sound information can be dramatically simplified, and the configuration of the sound source IC 85 itself can be simplified.

  In step S3101, it is determined whether start timing information is set in the data output area 84a. If the start timing information is set, it is determined in step S3102 whether or not the current sound generation processing activation timing is a timing corresponding to the start timing information. If it is not the start timing, the sound generation process is terminated as it is. If the start timing information is not set in step S3101 or if it is determined that the start timing is in step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103.

  In step S3103, a process of grasping the sound data address set in the data output area 84a is performed. In the subsequent step S3104, processing for obtaining sound source data from the sound source data storage area 83e is executed based on the sound data address. In the subsequent step S3105, processing for acquiring volume information from the sound source data storage area 83e is executed based on the sound data address.

  In step S3104 and step S3105, after grasping the sound source data and volume information in the current production set in the sound data setting process, a process for grasping the set volume information is executed in step S3106. The process of step S3106 is a process of grasping the set values of the Vol switches 75 and 76 connected to the sub control device 81.

  Incidentally, when the set values of the Vol switches 75 and 76 are changed or initialized, for example, the corresponding counter values in the various counter areas 84c of the RAM 84 are changed, and then the sound source IC 85 has the various counters. The counter value of the area 84c may be grasped, and the counter value may be grasped in step S3106. Further, when the setting values of the Vol switches 75 and 76 are changed or initialized, the values may be output to the sound source IC 85. Further, the Vol switches 75 and 76 may be connected to the sound source IC 85 directly or indirectly.

  Thereafter, in step S3107, sound generation control via the amplifier 86 and the speaker 87 is performed based on the sound source data acquired in step S3104 and the sound output amount grasped in steps S3105 and S3106. After executing the process of step S3107, the sound generation process is terminated.

  Here, the difference between the sound source data when 0 is set as the volume information and the sound source data when 1 to 139 is set as the volume information will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69A shows the relationship between the sound source data and the set value of each Vol switch when 0 is set as the volume information, and FIG. The relationship between the sound source data when a is set and the set value of each Vol switch is shown.

  As already described, in this embodiment, a first Vol switch 75 mainly for game hall managers and a second Vol switch 76 mainly for players are provided. The volume can also be set. For the first Vol switch 75, the volume can be set in 10 steps from 0 to 9, and for the second Vol switch 76, the volume can be set in 10 steps from 1 to 10. Regardless of the volume setting by any of the Vol switches 75 and 76, a louder sound is output as the set value increases.

  When the volume information is set as 0 as the sound data, as shown in FIG. 69A, the sound generation process is performed regardless of the volume setting of the first Vol switch 75 and the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76. However, the player cannot grasp the sound. That is, for sound source data in which the volume information is set to 0, a sound that cannot be grasped by the player is output regardless of the volume settings of both Vol switches 75 and 76. That is, no sound is output.

  When the volume information is set as a as the sound source data, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the setting value of the volume setting of the first Vol switch 75 and the setting value of the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76 are taken into consideration. A sound having a sound volume (in the figure, a value obtained by integrating both setting values and the output sound volume value of sound data is shown) is output. However, when the volume setting of the first Vol switch 75 is 0, a sound that cannot be grasped by the player is output regardless of the volume information and the volume setting of the second Vol switch 76. That is, no sound is output.

  The volume setting 0 of the first Vol switch 75 is used when a game hall administrator or the like adjusts the gaming machine. The reason why the volume setting 0 is not provided in the second Vol switch 76 while the volume setting 0 is provided in the first Vol switch 75 is that an illegal act (intentionally performed without generating a production sound) For example, it is difficult to prevent an error sound from being grasped by the manager of the game hall or to prevent an illegal bonus winning from being detected.

<Relationship between sound production and display production>
Next, the relationship between the frame update timing in the display effect, the update timing of the sound effect, and the length of the sound data will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG.

  When an effect is generated and display data (effect command) and sound data are set in the effect data setting process in the sub-control device 81 at the timing t1, the display control device 201 starts the frame from the timing t1. The sound generator IC 85 starts updating the sound generation process from the timing t1.

  As already described, the frame update period is 1/30 sec, which is about 33.3 msec. On the other hand, the update cycle of the sound generation process is 10 msec. The frame update cycle and the sound generation processing update cycle are indivisible by a natural number. Therefore, when the update of the frame and the sound generation process is started at the timing t1, the frame update period and the sound generation process update period hardly coincide with each other. For example, at the timing of t3 that is the update timing from the first frame to the second frame, there is a deviation of about 3.3 msec from the timing of t2 that is the update timing of the fourth sound generation process. In addition, at the timing t5 that is the update timing from the second frame to the third frame, there is a difference of about 6.6 msec from the timing t4 that is the update timing of the seventh sound generation process, and the eighth sound generation process. There is a deviation of about 3.4 msec from the timing of t6, which is the update timing. Therefore, even if you try to generate sound in the sound generation process so that the sound effect is started at the frame update timing, the sound effect is started earlier or later by the difference of the update cycle. End up.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to avoid such a shift, sound generation processing based on silence data is performed before the update timing of a frame (sound data generation frame) for starting sound production. Yes. Specifically, for example, in the third sound source IC 85c of FIG. 70 (e), the sound effect starts from the timing t3 which is the update timing to the second frame. In this case, in the sound data setting process of the sub-control device 81, the silence data and the sound data are set so that the sound generation process based on the silence data is performed from the timing t1 which is a timing before the timing t3. Set as a set. Also, in the fourth sound source IC 85d in FIG. 70 (f), the sound effect is started from the timing t5 which is the update timing to the third frame. In this case, in the sound data setting process of the sub-control device 81, the silence data and the sound data are set so that the sound generation process based on the silence data is performed from the timing t1 which is a timing before the timing t5. Set as a set. By doing in this way, it is not necessary to perform sound generation processing so that the sound production is started at the timing of t3 in the third sound source IC 85c and at the timing of t5 in the fourth sound source IC 85d, and the timing of t3 and t5 At this timing, it is only necessary to continue the reproduction of the sound data started before that time. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the shift | offset | difference of a display effect and a sound effect can be avoided suitably.

  The silence data set for the third sound source IC 85c is reproduction data having a length of one frame from the timing t1 to the timing t3, and the silence data set for the fourth sound source IC 85d is t5 from the timing t1. It is assumed that the playback data has a length of 2 frames until the timing of. In this way, by setting the silence data to be set in units of frames (natural number times the frame length), the processing configuration when setting the silence data can be simplified. .

  In the relationship between the third sound source IC 85c and the fourth sound source IC 85d in which silence data is set and the first sound source IC 85a and the second sound source IC 85b in which silence data is not set (FIG. 70 (c), FIG. 70 (d)) Regardless of whether data is set or not, any of the sound source ICs 85a to 85d starts reproduction of sound data (generation of sound by sound generation processing) from the start timing of the first frame. That is, the sound source ICs 85a to 85d do not need to monitor the sound reproduction start timing, and an increase in processing load on the sound source ICs 85a to 85d can be avoided.

  In addition, when the data amounts of the sound data of the first sound source IC 85a in which no silence data is set, and the third sound source IC 85c and the fourth sound source IC 85d in which the silence data is set are compared, all of the lengths from t1 to t10 (x Frame data), and the amount of data does not occur in each of the sound source ICs 85a, 85c, and 85d, and the processing is equalized.

  On the other hand, for the second sound source IC 85b that performs sound production from the start of the first frame to the end of the second frame, only sound data for two frames is set, and sound data for the third and subsequent frames is not set. That is, in the case where there is a period during which no sound effect is performed, such as the third sound source IC 85c and the fourth sound source IC 85d, and the sound effect is performed after that period, there is no sound to adjust the start timing of the sound effect. Even if there is a period in which no sound effect is performed, such as the second sound source IC 85b, although the data is set, if the sound effect is not performed after that period, the start timing of the sound effect is adjusted. Do not set silence data because it is not necessary. In this way, unnecessary data setting can be avoided and the amount of setting data can be reduced.

  In the relationship between the second sound source IC 85b and the fourth sound source IC 85d, the second sound source IC 85b performs sound production by sound generation processing based on sound data over the first frame and the second frame, and the fourth sound source IC 85d. For the first and second frames, sound production is not performed by sound generation processing based on silence data, while sound production is performed by sound generation processing based on sound data from the third frame to the xth frame. . That is, the sound effect is performed by the second sound source IC 85b from the first frame to the second frame, the sound effect is performed by the fourth sound source IC 85d from the third frame to the x frame, and the second sound source IC 85b and the fourth sound source are performed. A series of sound effects from the first frame to the xth frame is performed by the IC 85d. In this way, a configuration in which a series of sound effects are performed by a plurality of sound source ICs 85 can be realized by a single sound source IC 85 (for example, the first sound source IC 85a) even when sound effects of the same length are performed. The sound output location and output direction are different compared to the above, and the sound production becomes heavy. In addition, in such a configuration, the switching timing of the sound source IC 85 (in the above example, the frame In the update timing, it is possible to prevent the sound from being interrupted or duplicated, and the series of sound effects can be suitably realized.

  The fifth sound source IC 85e to the seventh sound source IC 85g in FIGS. 70 (g) to 70 (i) show patterns for realizing a series of sound effects as described above by a plurality of sound source ICs 85. For example, the fifth sound source IC 85e performs sound generation processing based on the sound data for the first frame as the first period, and the sixth sound source IC 85f performs sound based on the silence data for the first frame as the first period. The generation process is executed, and the sound generation process based on the sound data for the second frame is executed as the second period. That is, a series of sound effects spanning the first frame (fifth sound source IC 85e) and the second frame (sixth sound source IC 85f) are realized by the fifth sound source IC 85e and the sixth sound source IC 85f. Further, the seventh sound source IC 85g executes sound generation processing based on silence data of the first frame as the first period and the second frame as the second period, and the third period is the third period. The sound generation process based on the sound data for 3 frames is executed. That is, in addition to the fifth sound source IC 85e and the sixth sound source IC 85f, the seventh sound source IC 85g causes the first frame (fifth sound source IC 85e), the second frame (sixth sound source IC 85f), and the third frame (seventh sound source IC 85g). A series of sound effects are realized. In this way, by using silence data in a configuration in which sound generation / output is performed by a plurality of sound source ICs 85, a series of sound effects with different sound output locations and output directions can be produced. This can be realized without causing the occurrence of the above.

  In the above embodiment, when the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is a predetermined number or more, the silence data from the timing t1 is not set as in the eighth sound source IC 85h in FIG. In this case, the update timing (t8) of the sound generation process immediately before the start timing (t9) of the sound data generation frame is specified, and the update timing is combined with the update timing (start timing information) of the sound generation process. To the start timing of the sound data generation frame (the xth frame), and the sound data (t9 to t10) after the sound data generation frame. Voiced data) is set. In this way, when sound generation processing based on silence data can be performed over an excessively long period, the silence data for the entire period is not set, but the set silence data is minimized. Thus, it is possible to reduce the amount of setting data.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A display effect and a sound effect are set in the effect data setting process in the sub-control device 81. Based on the setting, a display effect is performed in the display control device 201, and a sound effect is performed in the sound source IC 85. In this configuration, the update timing of the display effect on the display control device 201 side is different from the update timing of the sound effect on the sound source IC 85 side, and these update cycles are indivisible. In such a configuration, the two update timings are not easily synchronized. For example, even if an attempt is made to start the sound effect at the update timing of the display effect, there is a difference between the two effects due to a difference from the update timing on the sound effect side. End up. Therefore, in the above configuration, the silent data is set before the update timing of the display effect and the voice data is set from the update timing of the display effect, and the sound based on the silent data is updated at the update timing of the sound effect side. The playback is started. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to start the sound effect based on the sound data at the update timing of the display effect while the deviation exists in the update timing of both effects.

  When setting silent data, the voice data generation frame on the display effect side is grasped, and the data amount and setting method of the silent data to be set are varied depending on the grasp result. More specifically, as in the first sound source IC 85a to the seventh sound source IC 85g in FIG. 70, when the sound data generation frame is less than the predetermined number of frames, silence data is set from the start frame (first frame), As in the case of the eighth sound source IC 85h in FIG. 70, when the number of frames is greater than or equal to the predetermined number of frames, the silent data from the update timing of the sound effect immediately before the sound data generation frame is set. In other words, if too long silence data is set, the amount of data to be set increases, and the processing load may increase if the start timing information must be set although the data amount is small. . By doing so, it is possible to maintain a balance between the amount of silent data to be set and the processing load.

  When the silence data is set from the start frame, the silence data can be set in a frame unit length. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a deviation from the display effect with a simple configuration without requiring a special process for matching the length of the silent data with the frame update period.

  In the sound data setting process of the sub-control device 81, the sound data for each sound source IC 85 is set in the sound data setting process of the sub-control device 81, and each sound source IC 85 is configured to execute the sound generation process individually. In this way, after the sound data setting process is performed on the sub-control device 81 side, the execution of the sound effect can be left to the sound source ICs 85, and the sub-control device 81 side generates a new effect. It is possible to perform other processes provided for the above.

  In each effect, the plurality of sound source ICs 85 are set so that the sound data generation frames can be different. The sub-control device 81 is configured to set silence data for each sound data generation frame. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to produce the production effect by the superimposed sound production by the plurality of sound source ICs 85 using a simple sound shift prevention mechanism using silence data.

  In a configuration in which sound generation processing is performed by a plurality of sound source ICs 85, sound generation processing based on sound data is performed at a predetermined timing for one sound source IC 85, and sound based on silence data is processed at the same predetermined timing for other sound source ICs 85. The sound data of each sound source IC 85 can be set so that the generation process is performed. By doing so, it is possible to realize a continuous sound effect while overlapping the sounds of the sound source ICs 85 with each other.

  The sound data including the silence data is set in the data output area 84a of the RAM 84, and each sound source IC 85 can access the data output area 84a. By doing so, there is no need to output a command or the like in order to give a sound effect command to each sound source IC 85 from the sub-control device 81, and the processing configuration for exchanging information can be simplified. Information omission can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, in the data output area 84a, address information of sound source data is set as sound data, and the sound source IC 85 is configured to acquire sound source data from the sound source data storage area 83e of the ROM 83 based on the address information. . As a result, raw data for reproduction (sound source data) is not set in the data output area 84a, and the amount of information to be set can be greatly reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when setting the sound effect.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, silence data is set as sound data to be subjected to sound generation processing before the sound data. In the present embodiment, silence data is also set after the sound data. FIG. 71 shows an example of a sound effect data table in the present embodiment.

  In the present embodiment, the sound data generation frame is set as the first frame in any sound source IC 85 in the effect with the effect number p. For the first sound source IC 85a, the sound data numbers indicating the sound source data after the sound data generation frame are set as a number, a number, a number, x number, b number, b number, and b number. As already described, when the sound data number is x, silence data (H (0)) having a length in frame units is set. That is, in the p-th effect, the first sound source IC 85a performs sound generation processing based on the a-numbered sound data from the first frame, then performs sound generation processing based on the x-th silence data, and then b Sound generation processing based on the numbered voice data is performed.

  In the p-th effect, the second sound source IC 85b is set to x, c, c, c, x as sound data numbers indicating sound source data after the sound data generation frame. That is, in the p-th effect, the second sound source IC 85b performs the sound generation process based on the silence data of the xth from the first frame, and then performs the sound generation process based on the c-numbered sound data, and then the x The sound generation processing based on the silence data of the number is performed. That is, in this embodiment, even when the first frame is set as the sound data generation frame, sound generation processing based on silence data may be performed from the first frame. In other words, the sound up to the substantial sound data generation frame according to the number of substantial sound data generation frames (in the case of the second sound source IC 85b, substantially corresponds to the second frame). As the data number, a sound data number corresponding to silence data is stored in advance.

  71, the third sound source IC 85c shows a modification of the second sound source IC 85b. That is, in the second sound source IC 85b, among the sound data numbers of x, c, c, c, and x, the sound data number of x after the c is not stored and the sound of the c After the sound generation process based on the sound data corresponding to the sound data number is performed, the sound generation process is not performed. Even if it does in this way, although the total data amount of the sound data for 1st sound source IC85a differs from the total data amount of the sound data for 3rd sound source IC85c, as a sound production, the same production effect is produced. It is possible to demonstrate.

  71, the fourth sound source IC 85d shows a modification of the substantial sound data generation frame. That is, in the present embodiment, the sound data generation frame is the first frame, while the sound data number corresponding to the silence data can be set in advance from the first frame. ) Is not limited to only the first frame, but may be a period corresponding to a frame in which sound generation processing based on sound data is performed. In the fourth sound source IC 85d, sound generation processing based on the sound data (c-number sound data) is substantially performed from the third frame. For the period corresponding to the first frame and the second frame, x No. of silent data is set.

  In the present embodiment, in the effect with the effect number q, the length of the silent data set after the sound data is particularly different from the effect of the p-th effect. For example, for the first sound source IC 85a and the second sound source IC 85b, the first frame is set as the sound data generation frame, and the sound data number corresponding to the sound data is set from the first frame. Yes. Specifically, for the first sound source IC 85a, sound data numbers of a number, a number, a number, a number, a number, y number, b number, b number, and b number are set. As already described, when the sound data number is y, silence data (H (0)) having a length shorter than the length of each frame is set. In other words, in the q-th production, the first sound source IC 85a performs the sound generation process based on the a-numbered sound data from the first frame, and then performs the sound generation process based on the y-th silence data in the middle of the frame. After that, sound generation processing based on the b-th sound data is performed.

  In the effect of the qth, the sound data numbers of c + 1, c + 1, c + 1, b + 1, a, y, b, b, b are set for the second sound source IC 85b. As shown in FIG. 66, the sound data of the c + 1 sound data, the b + 1 sound data, and the a sound data are the same, but the volume information is different, and the c + 1, b + 1, and a sound numbers are the same. The volume is set to gradually decrease in this order. Therefore, in the production of the qth, the second sound source IC 85b, after performing the sound generation processing based on the c + 1th sound data from the first frame, gradually decreases the volume, and the yth silence data in the middle of the frame Then, the sound generation process based on the b-th sound data is performed.

  In the effect of number q, for the third sound source IC 85c, the first frame and the third frame are set as the sound data generation frame. As the sound data numbers, a-number, a-number, and a-number are set, and then b-number, b-number, and b-number are set after a data blank period. In this case, in the sound data setting process (FIG. 64), the first frame and the third frame are recognized as the sound data generation frame in the process of determining the sound data generation frame (step S3003). In step S3006 in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number of frames is equal to or greater than 0 as a determination of whether or not the number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of frames. That is, an affirmative determination is always made in step S3006 in the present embodiment. Thereafter, in steps S3009 to S3012, silence data (y-th silence data) corresponding to a period until the update timing of the third sound source IC 85c immediately before the update timing to the third frame is set, and the start timing is set. As such, the update timing of the immediately preceding third sound source IC 85c is set.

  FIG. 72 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the frame update timing, the sound effect update timing, and the sound data length in this embodiment.

  When the p-th display effect and the sound effect are started at the timing of t11, sound generation by the sound generation process is started in any of the first sound source IC 85a to the fourth sound source IC 85d. In this case, the first sound source IC 85a is a sound generation process based on sound data, while the second sound source IC 85b to the fourth sound source IC 85d all start a sound generation process based on silence data.

  At the timing t12, which is the update timing from the first frame to the second frame, the sound data of the sound generation process of the first sound source IC 85a is switched from sound data to silence data. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation process of the first sound source IC 85a (the sound output from the first speaker 87a) is switched from the sound that can be grasped by the player to the sound that cannot be grasped (difficult to grasp). At the same timing, the sound data of the sound generation processing of the second sound source IC 85b and the third sound source IC 85c is switched from silence data to sound data. For this reason, the sound generated by the sound generation processing of the second sound source IC 85b and the third sound source IC 85c (the sound output from the second speaker 87b and the third speaker 87c) is a sound that the player cannot grasp (difficult to grasp). The sound is switched to a sound that can be grasped. For the fourth sound source IC 85d, since the silence data is inherited from the silence data, the sound is not switched at the same timing.

  At the timing t13, which is the update timing from the second frame to the third frame, the sound data of the sound generation processing of the first sound source IC 85a and the fourth sound source IC 85d is switched from silence data to sound data. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation processing of the first sound source IC 85a and the fourth sound source IC 85d (the sound output from the first speaker 87a and the fourth speaker 87d) is a sound that the player cannot grasp (difficult to grasp). The sound is switched to a sound that can be grasped. At the same timing, the sound data of the sound generation processing of the second sound source IC 85b and the third sound source IC 85c is switched from sound data to silence data, or the sound generation processing ends. Therefore, the sound generated by the sound generation processing of the second sound source IC 85b (the sound output from the second speaker 87b) is switched from the sound that can be grasped by the player to the sound that cannot be grasped (difficult to grasp), When the sound generation processing of the three sound source ICs 85c is ended (stopped), no sound is output from the third speaker 87c. Then, at the timing t14 when the third frame ends, the p-th effect ends.

  When the q-th display effect and sound effect are started at the timing of t15, sound generation by sound generation processing is started in any of the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source IC 85c. For the first sound source IC 85a, the sound generation processing based on the sound data is performed after the timing t16 that is the update timing from the first frame to the second frame, and the timing of t20 that is the update timing to the third frame. The sound generation processing based on the silence data is switched to the previous timing at the timing t18 during the display period of the second frame. Then, the sound generation process based on the sound data is switched again at the timing of t20, and the sound generation process based on the sound data is continued until the timing of t21.

  The second sound source IC 85b is the same as the first sound source IC 85a in that sound generation processing based on sound data is performed at the switching timing (t18) from the start timing (t15) of the first frame to the silence data. However, the sound data (volume information) is set so that the volume gradually decreases. That is, the one-stage volume becomes smaller than before at the timing of t16, and the volume becomes smaller than before at the timing of t17. Then, at timing t18, the sound is switched to sound generation processing based on silence data, and the player cannot completely hear the sound. Thereafter, the point of switching to the sound data at the timing of t20 and the point that the sound generation processing based on the sound data is continued until the timing of t21 are the same as in the first sound source IC 85a.

  For the third sound source IC 85c, sound generation processing based on sound data is performed from the start of the first frame to the end of the first frame, but the sound generation processing is temporarily ended at the timing t16 when the first frame ends. To do. Thereafter, the sound generation process based on the silence data is resumed from the timing t19 which is the execution timing of the sound generation process immediately before the timing t20 which is the update timing to the third frame. Then, the sound generation processing based on the sound data is switched from the silent data at the timing t20, and the sound generation processing based on the sound data is continued until the timing t21.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The silence data is set to be the target of the sound generation process after the sound data. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to adjust the data amount and reproduction length of the sound data set to each sound source IC 85 by silence data. When silence data is set to be the target of sound generation processing before the sound data, the amount of silence data set is determined by the order of the sound data generation frame, while the target of sound generation processing is When the silence data is set so as to be, the set amount of the silence data is not defined by the voice data generation frame. Therefore, it can be said that it is preferable to set the silent data after the sound data in adjusting the total data amount and the reproduction length. In other words, it is possible to adjust the data amount and playback length of the sound data to be set depending on whether or not silence data is set after the sound data.

  Further, since silence data can be set after the sound data, a plurality of sound data generation frames can be set. That is, a plurality of sound production start timings can be set in one sound source IC 85. In such a sound production having a plurality of start timings, if the silence data is set between the sound data and the sound data, each sound source IC 85 is based on the sound data without monitoring each start timing. Thus, the sound generation processing may be performed sequentially, and the processing configuration can be greatly simplified.

  Each sound data can be set so that the switching timing between the voice data and the silent data in one sound source IC 85 and the switching timing between the voice data and the silent data in the other sound source IC 85 overlap. In a configuration in which sound production is performed by a plurality of sound source ICs 85, even if an attempt is made to control the start and end of sound production by on / off control of sound reproduction without using silence data, some control is performed due to the processing cycle. There is a possibility of shifting. In particular, when one is turned off and the other is turned on, if the off control is shifted first or the on control is shifted later, a sound production blank period occurs. Conversely, if the off control is shifted later or the on control is shifted first, the sound effects are unintentionally duplicated. In that respect, in the above configuration, since the silence data is used as an alternative to the on / off control, the sound source IC 85 does not need to grasp the timing at which the on / off control should be performed. The sound generation processing based on the above may be performed sequentially, and the occurrence of inconvenience based on the on / off control as described above can be avoided.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, whether or not silence data is set varies depending on the type of effect. FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the types of effects that are continued over a plurality of games as an example of the types of effects.

  As the types of effects that are continued over a plurality of games, for example, there are effects in the bonus shown in FIG. 73 (a) and effects in the attack mode shown in FIG. 73 (b).

  As described above, the bonus state is set to end by paying out a predetermined number of medals, and is substantially implemented during the bonus depending on the winning probability of the winning combination in the bonus and the number of winning combinations. The number of games to be played is a fixed number of games (24 games). In the effect during the bonus, the content of the effect is set to be different for each game, and the corresponding effect is set according to the number of games in the bonus state (in the continuous effect setting process of FIG. 54, according to the bonus effect counter). Production is set).

  For example, in the effect during the bonus, the first game to the fifth game correspond to the opening effect, and the effect of celebrating the bonus winning (transition to the bonus state) continues for 5 games. For the sixth game to the twelfth game, the winning BB-specific effects are performed according to the types of bonuses (first BB or second BB) that have been won and transferred. In the thirteenth game to the nineteenth game, effects by display mode at the time of winning corresponding to the display mode in the game won by the bonus are performed. And as a special effect, the 20th game to the 23rd game notify the presence / absence of simultaneous winning in the attack mode or the VB mode, for example. The 24th game corresponds to an ending effect, and the number of medals acquired during the bonus is displayed.

  In the bonus effect, the effect is updated at the start timing of each game, more specifically, at the operation timing of the start lever 41. In other words, for example, at the timing when the sixth game is started in the situation where the opening effect is being performed, the opening effect is updated to the effect based on the winning BB, and in the situation where the effect based on the winning BB is being performed. At the timing when the 13 games are started, the winning BB-specific effects are updated. Similarly, at the start timing of the twentieth game, the effect from the winning BB is updated to the effect at the display mode at the time of winning, and at the start timing of the nineteenth game, the effect from the display at the time of the winning mode is changed to the special effect. The ending effect is updated at the start timing of the 24th game.

  As described above, the effect during bonus is an effect that is updated to a new effect during an operation (start operation) for advancing the game among effects that continue over a plurality of games. In other words, when an operation for advancing the game that is an opportunity to update to a new effect is not performed, the update to the new effect is not performed. For example, after the fifth game is ended, the start operation of the sixth game is performed. If is not performed, it waits when the opening effect up to the fifth game is completed. More specifically, the display effect and the sound effect are not updated until a game start operation that becomes an update opportunity is performed. For example, the end frame is still displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 65, and the speaker The sound effect from the device 64 is no longer generated when the sound effect corresponding to the frame at the end of the sound is finished, and the sound effect is silenced (they overlap with other effects). If so, the sound production can be performed). Alternatively, the display frame remains the frame at the end, and for sound production, for example, predetermined music is repeatedly reproduced.

  The effect in the attack mode is an effect that is set when the display mode shifts to the attack mode in the display mode setting process in step S1901. As shown in FIG. 73 (b), after the opening effect from the start, the first turn effect, the second turn effect, ..., the seventh turn effect are performed, and then the first turn effect is returned. The opening effect is performed for 15 seconds, and each subsequent turn effect is switched to the next turn effect after 15 seconds. In other words, except for the opening effect, the first turn effect to the seventh turn effect are performed in 105 seconds, and one round is set as a loop effect of 105 seconds. Each turn effect is, for example, an effect in which the front of the hero's (female character) face is displayed up in the first turn effect, and the appearance of the hero running from the left in the second turn effect. An effect is set, and in the third turn effect, an effect is set such that the main character is practicing a volleyball serve, and the contents of the effect are set differently for each turn.

  In this case, in the production in the attack mode, the update timing of each turn production is performed over time. For example, even if the player does not perform a game operation (start operation or stop operation) during the attack mode, the effect during the attack mode progresses with time.

  In other words, the production in the attack mode is a production in which the content of the production progresses as time elapses among the productions that continue over a plurality of games, and a new production is performed in the operation (starting operation) to advance the game. Once the setting is made without updating, the effect continues until the transition to another display mode occurs.

  The sound data setting process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

  In this embodiment, the process which grasps | ascertains the content of this production in step S3201 is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S3001. In subsequent step S3202, it is determined whether or not the content of the effect grasped in step S3201 is a loop effect. More specifically, the effect progresses based on the passage of time as in the attack mode effect, not the effect that the effect progresses based on the game operation as in the bonus effect, and the effect loops at a predetermined period. It is determined whether or not the production is to be performed. If it is a loop effect, the process advances to step S3203 to perform processing for grasping the value of the sound source counter K. The processing from step S3203 to step S3216 is the same as the processing from step 3002 to step S3015. That is, in the case of a loop effect, a process for preventing a sound shift caused by setting silence data is performed as in the first and second embodiments.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3202 that it is not a loop effect, that is, if the current effect is, for example, a bonus effect, the process proceeds to step S3217. In step S3217, processing for grasping the value of the sound source counter K is performed, and the sound source IC 85 to be processed this time is specified. Such processing is the same as step S3203 (step S3002). After that, in step S3218, processing for grasping the sound data generation frame is performed in the same manner as in step S3204 (step S3003), and in step S3219, the presence or absence after the sound data generation frame is performed as in step S3205 (step S3004). Performs processing to determine the sound data address.

  In a succeeding step S3220, a process of specifying the sound source IC update timing immediately before the sound data generation frame is performed. Such processing is the same as the processing in step S3210 (step S3009). In step S3221, the timing specified in step S3220 is used as start timing information, and the start timing information and the information on the voiced data address grasped in step S3219 are included in the data output area 84a. A process of setting the area corresponding to the sound source counter K is performed. In step S3222, an update process for incrementing the sound source counter K by 1 is performed, and in step S3223, it is determined whether or not the upper limit value (24) has been reached. If a negative determination is made in step S3223, the process returns to step S3217. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3223, a sound data setting process is performed after the sound source counter K is reset to the initial value (1) in step S3224. Exit.

  As described above, with the configuration in which the silent data is set at the time of the loop effect, it is possible to efficiently eliminate the shift, particularly when the shift from the display effect is likely to occur.

  In addition, silence data is set at the time of a loop effect, while silence data is not set for an effect whose effect update timing is set at the operation timing accompanying the progress of the game. The amount can be reduced. In other words, for loop effects that are prone to misalignment, avoid the misalignment, and even if a misalignment occurs, if a new production setting is made by a subsequent game operation, a slight misalignment will occur. Since the generation is allowed and priority is given to the reduction of the data setting amount, it is possible to suitably maintain a balance between the effect and the processing load when performing various sound effects.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In each of the embodiments described above, the difference between the display effect and the sound effect has been described, but in the present embodiment, a description will be given regarding the difference between the other effects and the sound effect. Here, a reel rotation effect by rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be described as another effect.

  In the present embodiment, in the reel rotation effect, a specific effect in which a specific sound is generated at a timing when a predetermined symbol reaches a predetermined position is set. For example, as shown in FIG. 75, the specific sound is generated from the speaker device 64 at the timing when the 16th “red 7” symbol of the left reel 32L reaches the lower line L3 (lower stage) as a predetermined position. . In this case, as long as the left reel 32L rotates, the specific effect is continuously performed, and a specific sound is generated every time the 16th “red 7” symbol reaches the lower line L3.

  Here, a supplementary explanation will be given regarding the rotation control of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

  As already described, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is individually controlled by driving of each stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal of 504 pulses, and the rotational position of the stepping motor, that is, the rotational position of the reel is controlled by this excitation pulse. The excitation pulse is output pulse by pulse in step S106 of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14) of the main controller 101. As the excitation pulse, one pulse is output at a cycle of 1.49 msec which is a processing cycle of the timer interruption process, and when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotating at a constant speed, the rotation angle based on the driving signal of one pulse, that is, The angle change for each process of the timer interrupt process is about 0.714 °. Further, when the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are rotating at a constant speed, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate once at 750.96 msec (1.49 × 504).

  As already described, the update cycle of the sound data in the sound generation processing of the sound source IC 85 is 10 msec, and is indivisible by a natural number from the update cycle for one turn of each of the reels 32L, 32M, 32R. Therefore, if a specific sound is generated in the update cycle of the sound generation process, a shift of 0.96 msec per rotation may occur.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, in a specific effect that generates a specific sound every time a predetermined pattern reaches a predetermined position, sound generation processing based on silence data is performed at a timing different from the timing at which the specific sound is generated. .

  FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the specific effect process in the present embodiment. The specific effect start process is a process that is performed when the main control device 101 starts the rotation start process (step S402) of the reel control process (FIG. 18). For example, this is performed when a special effect generation lottery is won in the rotation effect process (step S401).

  In step S3301, a process of grasping the position of a predetermined symbol on the left reel 32L before starting the reel rotation is performed. Specifically, a process of grasping the amount of deviation from the 16th “Red 7” symbol that is the subject of the special effect is performed from the number of the symbol stopped at the predetermined position (lower line L3).

  In the subsequent step S3302, the period required until the constant speed rotation is grasped based on the effect set in the rotation start effect, and a process for grasping the period until the predetermined symbol reaches the predetermined position from the start of the rotation is performed. Specifically, taking into account acceleration processing at the start of rotation, etc., processing for grasping the period from when the constant speed rotation is reached until the symbol that is the subject of the special effect reaches a predetermined position is performed. In this case, for example, when a freeze effect with rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is set in the rotation start effect, the symbol that is the target of the special effect is placed at a predetermined position in consideration of the period. The time to reach is known.

  Thereafter, in step S3303, a process for outputting a sound effect command including information on the period grasped in step S3302 is output to the sub-control device 81, and then the special effect process is terminated. The sub-control device 81 performs a sound data setting process based on the received sound effect command, and generates a specific sound in the special effect by performing a sound generation process by each sound source IC 85.

  In this case, in the sound data setting process, silence data is set in a period until constant speed rotation is reached. Then, after reaching the constant speed rotation, sound data having a length of 24 pulses (35.76 msec = 1.49 msec × 24 processing) corresponding to one symbol when the predetermined symbol reaches the predetermined position, and 20 It is set as a loop effect to be subjected to sound generation processing alternately with silence data of a length of 480 pulses (715.2 msec) which is a pattern.

  FIG. 77 is a timing chart for explaining the relationship between the symbol position of the left reel 32L and the sound data in the special effect.

  When rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is started at the timing t22, a constant speed rotation is reached at the timing t23 through the acceleration period. Thereafter, at time t24, the 16th “red 7” symbol as the predetermined symbol reaches the lower line L3. The predetermined symbol passes through the lower line L3 by the timing of t25, and the next symbol (No. 17 “watermelon” symbol) reaches the lower line L3 at the timing of t25. Then, the predetermined symbol reaches the lower line L3 again at the timing of t26, which is the next arrival timing, and the next symbol reaches the lower line L3 at the timing of t27.

  In this case, in the period from t22 to t24, silence data is set as sound data corresponding to the sound source IC 85 (denoted as the nth sound source IC in the figure) that performs the sound effect in the special effect. Also, in the period from t24 to t25, voice data is set, and in the period from t25 to t26, silence data is set. The sound data is set at the timing from t26 to t27, and thereafter, the sound data is set as a loop effect so that the sound data is set for each rotation cycle.

  As described above, when performing a sound effect synchronized with the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, by setting the silence data and the sound data according to the rotation period, the update period on the sound effect side or The sound effect synchronized with the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R can be suitably executed without changing the control mode of the rotation control of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R.

  In particular, when the sound effect synchronized with the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is used as a so-called push assist that suggests that a predetermined pattern has reached a predetermined position, the sound effect and the rotation position of the reel are shifted. When this occurs, not only is the inconvenience that the degree of attention is reduced due to the deviation, but the sound production that becomes the indicator does not make sense of the indicator when performing the appearance based on the assistance of the eye, On the contrary, it causes a disadvantage to the player. However, in order to avoid such sound misalignment, if the reel rotation control mode is adjusted to the sound production side, the difference in the case of not performing the eye pressing assistance causes a mistake in the eye pressing. Even if you try to produce a sound in anticipation that the specified pattern will reach the specified position without using silence data, you will be forced to change the update timing on the sound production side. It will be necessary. In this respect, if the silent data is used and synchronized with the rotation cycle as described above, it is possible to avoid the deviation with a simple configuration.

  Further, as described above, the processing cycle of the rotation control of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R depends on the processing cycle (1.49 msec) of the timer interrupt processing of the main control device 101, and the processing cycle (10 msec) of the sound source IC 85. Are not divisible by each other, and the processing cycle (33.3 msec) of the display control apparatus 201 is also not divisible by each other. That is, for example, as in the first to third embodiments, the present embodiment may be configured to synchronize the processing cycle without using silence data in order to synchronize the display effect and the sound effect. As described above, if an attempt is made to add a synchronized effect between the effect on the main control device 101 side and the sound effect, it becomes necessary to further synchronize the processing cycles. In that regard, by using silence data as in the above configuration, it is possible to easily synchronize with the effects of each processing cycle without changing any processing cycle.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. Moreover, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration composed of combinations of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) The sub control device 81 sets sound data for the sound source IC 85, and the sound source IC 85 performs sound generation processing based on the sound data. However, the sub control device 81 itself However, the amplifiers 86 and the individual speakers 87 may be controllable based on the sound data.

  (2) The processing cycle of the V interrupt processing in the display control device 201, the processing cycle of the sound generation processing in the sound source IC 85, and the processing cycle of the timer interrupt processing by the main control device 101 are not limited to the above. These processing cycles only need to be different from each other. More specifically, if the relationship is not divisible by each other, misalignment is likely to occur. Therefore, the merits of applying the above inventions can be generated.

(3) In the sound data setting process, all sound data for each sound source IC 85 is set. However, the sound source IC 85 of the sound data to be set may be different depending on the contents of the effect. For example, in the case of the first effect, sound data for the first sound source IC 85a to the tenth sound source IC 85j is set, and in the case of the second effect, sound data for the eleventh sound source IC 85k to the twentieth sound source IC 85t is set.
In the case of the third effect, the sound source IC 85 set according to the effect contents may not be duplicated, such as setting sound data for the first sound source IC 85a to the fifteenth sound source IC 85о, or the sound source IC 85 set according to the effect contents. May be duplicated. In these cases, it is preferable that the sound data generation frame of each sound source IC 85 is set to be different, and whether or not silence data is set, the length of silence data to be set, start timing information, and the like are different depending on the sound source IC 85. It is good to make it. In addition, for example, the 21st sound source IC 85u to the 23rd sound source IC 85w may not be used in a normal state but may be used as an alternative when a problem (failure or the like) occurs in another sound source IC 85.

  (4) In the sound data setting processing, the sound data of each sound source IC 85 is set, but the sound data is set in the sound processing IC 85 for setting sound data based on the sound data generation frame and the sound data is set in this processing. The sound source IC 85 not to be used may be different. That is, for example, sound data may not be set in the current process for the sound source IC 85 in which the number of sound data generation frames is equal to or greater than a predetermined number of frames. In this case, when the sub-control device 81 temporarily stores the timing corresponding to the sound data generation frame for the sound source IC 85 and sets the sound data for the sound source IC 85 at a timing before the timing. Good. By doing in this way, it is not necessary for the sound source IC 85 to estimate the start timing for the sound source IC 85 for setting sound data later. In addition, this makes it possible to set the sound data of each sound source IC 85 at different timings, and to avoid a temporary increase in processing load by distributing the setting processing.

  (5) It is good also as a structure which changes whether silence data are set according to the content of the sound data production | generation frame in a display effect. For example, if the difference (for example, color tone, presence / absence of character, character motion, brightness, etc.) from the immediately preceding frame is greater than or equal to a predetermined value as the sound data generation frame, the silent data is set. If the difference from the frame is less than a predetermined value, the silence data may not be set. The greater the difference from the immediately preceding frame, the more likely it is to notice the difference between the sound effect and the display effect. By doing so, the effect of noticing the difference is detected using silence data. For effects that are difficult to notice the deviation, it is possible to allow the deviation without using the silence data and reduce the set data amount.

  (6) It is good also as a structure which changes whether silence data are set according to the content of sound production. For example, silence data may be set for an effect that starts a sound effect when the volume information is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and no silence data may be set for an effect that starts a sound effect when the volume information is less than a predetermined value. This is because it is considered that the larger the volume is, the easier it is to notice the difference between the sound effect and the display effect.

  Also, silence data is produced with an effect that starts sound production with sound source data in a frequency band that is easy for a player to recognize, and an effect that starts sound production with sound source data in a frequency band that is more difficult for the player to recognize than that frequency band. The silence data may be set for an effect in a frequency band that is easy to recognize, and the silence data may not be set for an effect in a frequency band that is difficult to recognize.

  (7) The silent data is sound data in which the generated sound cannot be grasped or is difficult to grasp regardless of the setting values of the Vol switches 75 and 76, but at least the second Vol switch 76 for player operation is used. Regardless of the setting value, the sound data may be sound data that the player cannot grasp or difficult to grasp, and depending on the setting value of the first Vol switch 75 for the game hall manager, the generated sound can be grasped. It is good also as a structure.

  (8) The silent data is stored in advance with a length in units of frames or a length corresponding to the amount of deviation between the voiced data generation frame and the sound generation processing, but the length of the silent data to be stored Is not limited to the above, but may be other lengths. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which can change a length each time instead of or in addition to the structure which memorize | stores the silence data of the length of a predetermined period beforehand. For example, when the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame is grasped, it is possible to create silence data as long as the number of frames, or the amount of deviation between the sound data generation frame and the sound generation processing. When it is determined, silence data having a length corresponding to the amount of deviation may be created each time. Furthermore, for example, silence data having a length of a specific period (eg, 0.01 msec) that is a relatively short period is stored in advance, and the silence data having the length of the specific period is stored in accordance with the grasped length. It is good also as a structure which sets silence data so that reproduction | regeneration may be performed repeatedly. In this case, the length of the specific period may be set so that the frame length (about 33.3 msec) and the shift amount can be divided by a natural number in the specific period.

  (9) In the sound data setting process, the sound data generation frame is specified and then the silence data and the sound data are set. However, depending on the contents of the production, A data set having a predetermined reproduction (generation) order may be prepared. More specifically, for example, for the first effect, after the sound generation process based on silence data is performed over the first period, the sound generation process based on sound data is performed over the second period. The first data set of silent data and voice data is stored in advance, and for the second effect, the voice data is generated after the sound generation processing based on the silent data is performed for the third period. The second data set of silent data and voiced data is stored in advance so that the sound generation processing based on is performed over the fourth period. In the sound data setting process for the first effect, the first data set is read and the data set is set in the data output area 84a. In the sound data setting process for the second effect, the second data set is set. The data set is read and the data set is set in the data output area 84a. In this way, it is not necessary to specify the sound data generation frame for each effect, and the process when the effect occurs can be simplified. Each of the above data sets includes not only a pattern in which sound generation processing is performed on sound data after the silence data but also a pattern in which sound generation processing is performed on the silence data after the sound data. Alternatively, a repetition pattern of silence data and sound data may be included.

  (10) In the sound data setting process, the address information of the sound data is set in the data output area 84a. However, the sound source data itself may be set. In this way, in the sound generation processing of each sound source IC 85, it is not necessary to perform processing for acquiring sound source data based on the address information, and only the sound source data in the data output area 84a is read (reproduced). The processing on the sound source IC 85 side can be simplified.

  (11) Although the sound data is exchanged between the sub-control device 81 and the sound source IC 85 via the data output area 84a, the sound data may be exchanged using a command or the like. Specifically, in the sound data setting process, the sound data (address information) set in the data output area 84a and a command including the sound source data are output to the sound source IC 85, and the sound source IC 85 generates a sound based on the command. It is good also as composition which performs. In this case, instead of the configuration in which the sub-control device 81 and the sound source IC 85 can perform bidirectional communication, a configuration in which the sub-control device 81 can communicate with the sound source IC 85 in a single direction (not bidirectional communication) may be employed.

  (12) The display control device 201 and the sub control device 81 are configured such that bidirectional communication is not possible and unidirectional communication is possible from the sub control device 81 to the display control device 201. However, bidirectional communication is possible. It is good also as a simple structure. In this case, an update timing (processing timing of V interrupt processing) from the display control device 201 to the sound data generation frame is output to the sub-control device 81, and the sound source IC 85 is synchronized with the update timing of the sound data generation frame. The sound generation process may be started at. Even in this case, for example, if the sound generation processing based on the silence data is performed before the rear sound data generation frame for an effect having a plurality of sound data generation frames, After the display control device 201 outputs the update timing to the sound data generation frame to the sub-control device 81 and starts the sound generation processing at that timing, it is only necessary to repeat the sound generation processing on the sound source IC 85 side. Since it is not necessary to output such information from the display control device 201 to the sub-control device 81 in the subsequent sound data generation frame, the processing can be simplified.

  (13) The sound data is output from the individual speaker 87 corresponding to the sound generation processing, so that the player outputs sound that is difficult or impossible to grasp. Although sound that can be grasped is output, sound data that outputs sound that is difficult to grasp or cannot be grasped due to interference with sound output from another individual speaker 87 may be set. That is, the sound data set for the first sound source IC 85 is the first sound data, and the sound data set for the second sound source IC 85 is the second sound data. In this case, the first sound that can be output by the sound generation process based on the first sound data and the second sound that is output by the sound generation process based on the second sound data are both sounds that can be grasped by the player. The first sound data and the second sound data are set so as to be, for example, by making the first sound and the second sound have a sound having a wavelength opposite to each other, One sound) is erased. Then, the first sound data is set in the first sound source IC 85 and the second sound data is set in the second sound source IC 85 so that the sound generation processing of the first sound data and the second sound data is performed simultaneously. The configuration is as follows. Even if it does in this way, if the sound generation process of the 3rd sound which a player can grasp | ascertain is performed following a 1st sound and a 2nd sound, the output start timing of the said 3rd sound will be set as sound generation processing. It is possible to set without depending on the update timing.

  (14) The first sound source IC 85a to the 23rd sound source IC 85w may be classified according to effects and uses, and the sound source ICs 85 for setting sound data may be made different according to the effects and uses. For example, the sound effects performed in combination with the display effects are configured to be performed by the first sound source IC 85a to the tenth sound source IC 85j, and the sound effects in combination with the rotation effects of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are the eleventh sound source ICs 85k to 20th. The sound source IC 85t is configured to perform the error notification, and the 21st sound source IC 85u to the 23rd sound source ICw are configured to perform sound effects. In the sound data setting process, the sound data for the corresponding sound source IC 85 is set, while the sound data for the non-corresponding sound source IC 85 is not set. In this way, it is not necessary to set sound data for the sound source IC 85 that is not used, and the processing can be simplified.

  (15) Although the sub-control device 81 is configured to control each sound source IC 85, the display control device 201 may be configured to control each sound source IC 85, or the main control device 101 may be configured to control each sound source IC 85. Good. Further, the sound source ICs 85 may be connected to the control devices 81, 101, and 201, and the sound source ICs 85 controlled by the control devices 81, 101, and 201 may be different.

  (16) The sound source IC 85 is configured to start sound generation processing based on a predetermined presentation trigger, but the sound source IC 85 is configured to always execute sound generation processing based on silence data, and the predetermined presentation trigger is It is good also as a structure which rewrites the sound data as the original data of the sound generation process in progress when it occurs. Specifically, the sound source IC 85 is configured to repeatedly perform sound generation processing at a predetermined cycle (10 msec) after the power is turned on, for example. When it is not the execution timing of the production, the address information of the sound data that is the source of the sound generation process is the address information of the silence data. In other words, a state in which sound is output based on silence data is a standby state. Then, when a predetermined performance trigger occurs, the address information of the silence data set in the data output area 84a in the sound data setting process of the sub-control device 81 is used as the address of the sound data corresponding to the current effect. It is configured to rewrite information. In this way, the sound source IC 85 only needs to repeatedly perform sound generation processing (sound output), and the configuration of the sound source IC 85 can be simplified.

  (17) The effect performed in combination with the sound effect is not limited to the display effect or the rotation effect of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. A light emission effect using a light emitting unit such as the above may be used. As an operation effect, for example, by controlling the driving of a predetermined driving unit, the accessory can be displaced between the first position and the second position, and the movement is performed from the first position to the second position at a predetermined timing. Set the production. Then, a sound effect is performed so that a predetermined sound is generated at the timing of displacement to the second position. In such a configuration, if it is configured to compensate for the deviation that may occur due to the relationship between the drive cycle of the drive control of the predetermined drive unit and the update cycle of the sound generation process, the timing of displacement to the second position It is possible to match the timing at which the predetermined sound is generated.

  (18) In the configuration in which the sound effect and the rotation effect of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are combined, the sound generation process based on the silence data is performed except for the timing when the predetermined pattern reaches the predetermined position. For example, sound generation processing based on voiced data in which the volume information setting value gradually increases may be performed so that the volume increases as the position approaches a predetermined position, or the volume decreases as the distance from the predetermined position increases. As described above, sound generation processing based on sound data in which the setting value of the volume information gradually decreases may be performed. In these cases, it is only necessary that the sound generation process based on the silence data is performed at least at any timing when the predetermined picture does not reach the predetermined position. In other words, regardless of the length of the silence data, it is sufficient if the gap between the rotation period of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R and the generation period of the specific sound is compensated by the silence data.

  (19) In the configuration in which the sound effect and the rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R are combined, a specific sound is generated during the constant speed rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R. It is good also as a structure which synchronizes rotation and sound production of a period until it reaches (during acceleration period). Specifically, it may be configured to synchronize with a sound effect in a freeze effect in which each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is rotated at a low speed during an operation invalid period of the stop switches 42 to 44, or the like.

  (20) When an effect command is output in the display data setting process in the effect data setting process on the sub-control device 81 side, the display control device 201 starts updating the frame at the update timing of the subsequent V interrupt process. For this reason, there may be a case where a deviation occurs in the start timing between the display effect and the sound effect. Therefore, for example, the V control processing of the display control device 201 is started based on the reception of the effect command (same configuration as the sound generation processing on the sound source IC 85 side), or the display control device 201 and the sub control device 81 are configured. And the execution timing (execution status) of the V interrupt process on the display control device 201 side in the effect data setting process of the sub control device 81, and based on the grasp result, The production command may be output and the sound data setting process may be performed.

  (21) In the sound data setting process of the sub-control device 81, each address information of the sound data number corresponding to the effect number is set in the data output area 84a, and in the sound generation process of the sound source IC 85, the respective address information is set. The sound source data is individually acquired based on this, and the sound source data having a predetermined playback length is connected to generate sound. However, the sound source data having the playback length of the entire effect corresponding to the effect number is stored. In addition, it may be configured to generate sound by reading sound source data having the reproduction length of the entire effect.

  (22) In the sound data setting process, whether the silence data is set in units of frames or whether the silence data is set by grasping the amount of deviation differs depending on the number of frames up to the sound data generation frame. The number of frames is not limited to the above (150). Moreover, it is good also as a structure which changes with the production | generation contents irrespective of the number of frames to a sound data generation frame or in addition to the number of frames to a sound data generation frame.

  (23) If the sound data generation frame is after 1/3 sec which is a common divisor between the update cycle of the sound generation process of the sound source IC 85 and the update cycle of the V interrupt process of the display control device 201, the common divisor is A configuration may be adopted in which sound generation processing using silence data is performed in units of frames from an update cycle that is a natural number multiple.

  (24) In the sound data setting process, whether the silence data is set in the length of the frame unit or the silence data is set in the length corresponding to the shift amount is different. It may be possible to set silence data having a length in combination with the corresponding length.

  (25) As an example of the effect in the attack mode as the loop effect, the first turn effect to the seventh turn effect is performed, and then the first turn effect to the seventh turn effect is shown again. There is no need to loop the loop. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the seventh turn effect is performed from the first turn effect, the process returns to the first turn effect, and the process returns to the first turn effect after performing the sixth turn effect. Moreover, it is good also as a structure from which the part to loop differs for every loop. For example, after performing the 7th turn production from the 1st turn production, it is good also as composition which performs the 6th turn production from the 1st turn production, and then performs the 7th turn production from the 2nd turn production.

  (26) In a configuration in which silence data is set as sound data for each sound source IC 85 so that the reproduction length of the sound data for each sound source IC 85 is matched, the silence data is set after all the sound data. Also good. For example, for the first sound source IC 85a, the reproduction of the sound data ends at the first timing, and for the second sound source IC 85b, the reproduction of the sound data ends at the second timing after the first timing. By setting the silence data from the first timing to the second timing as sound data of the first sound source IC 85a, the sound reproduction end timings of the first sound source IC 85a and the second sound source IC 85b are matched. Can do. In this case, the second sound source IC 85b may be configured to set silence data corresponding to a timing after the second timing and also set the corresponding silence data for the first sound source IC 85a. In addition to the above, when the reproduction of the sound data for the third sound source IC 85c ends at the third timing after the second timing, the sound data of the first sound source IC 85a is changed from the first timing to the third time. In addition to setting the silence data for up to the timing of, and setting the silence data for the second to third timing as the sound data of the second sound source IC 85c, the first sound source IC 85a to the third sound source The reproduction end timing of the sound of the IC 85c can be matched.

  (27) The slot machine having three reels and three corresponding stop switches in parallel has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, five reel switches and five corresponding stop switches are arranged in parallel. It may be a slot machine. From the viewpoint of suppressing erroneous operation in the reel stop operation, it is sufficient that there are at least two reels and corresponding stop switches. In addition, the slot machine in which the number of bets is 3 and the effective line is set to 1 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, the effective line may be 5 lines.

  (28) Although the example which actualized about the slot machine 10 was shown, you may apply to the game machine of the type which united the slot machine and the pachinko machine. That is, in the slot machine, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions, a gaming machine having a ball insertion and ball payout function such as a pachinko machine may be used. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only a ball can be handled as a gaming value in the gaming hall. Therefore, the gaming value seen in the current gaming hall in which pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed is used. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the location of the gaming machine can be solved.

  In addition, when a game ball is launched into a game area and a game ball enters a specific area of a special device such as a pachinko machine in which a big hit lottery is performed based on the game ball winning at the start winning opening, Pachinko machines of the type that opens a predetermined number of times, pachinko machines of a type that wins when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, a pachinko machine with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, etc. The present invention can also be applied to other gaming machines.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a characteristic configuration extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

  The invention shown in each of the following feature groups is as follows. “As a kind of gaming machine, a pachinko machine, a slot machine, and the like are known. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is performed based on a predetermined lottery condition. In the slot machine, specifically, a start lever is operated in a situation where a medal as a game medium is bet. Then, the internal lottery is performed and the rotation of the reel is started, and if the stop switch is operated during the rotation of the reel, the rotation of the reel is stopped. If the result corresponds to the result of the above, a privilege corresponding to the result is given (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2008-295707). As a kind of effect corresponding to the result of selection, etc., there is a case where a sound effect is performed by sound generation means such as a speaker. For example, there is still room for improvement in terms of sound production. ”

<Feature A group>
Feature A1. Based on the occurrence of a predetermined effect, predetermined effect means for executing a predetermined effect by a predetermined effect means (liquid crystal display device 65) (function of executing display data setting processing by sub control device 81, display) A function of executing V interrupt processing by the control device 201),
Sound effect means (sub-sub) that executes a sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means by sound generated by a predetermined sound generation means (speaker device 64 including a sound source IC 85, an amplifier 86, and an individual speaker 87) A function of executing sound data setting processing by the control device 81, a function of executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85),
A gaming machine comprising
First update means (function for executing V interrupt processing by the display control device 201) capable of executing update processing of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means in a first period (about 33.3 msec);
Second update means (function for executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85) capable of executing sound generation control by the sound generation means in a second period (10 msec) different from the first period;
With
The sound production means is
Setting means (a function for executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81) for setting sound information (sound data) of the sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means;
The sound generation means sequentially generates the sound production sound based on the sound information set by the setting means,
The setting means uses, as the sound information, special information (silence data) that makes it difficult or impossible for a player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generation means, by the sound generation means corresponding to the special information. It is possible to set so that the sound is generated at least one before and after a predetermined update timing in the first period.

  In a gaming machine in which the predetermined effect that is updated in the first period is executed together with the sound effect that is generated in the second period, the predetermined effect and the sound effect are executed separately, so the processing is distributed. On the other hand, due to the difference in period, there is a high possibility that there is a difference between the update timing of the predetermined performance and the generation timing of the sound in the sound performance. If such a deviation occurs, not only can you not fully expect the production effect of the predetermined production and sound production, but the deviation will awaken the player and reduce the degree of attention on the contrary Can be. In that respect, in the above-described configuration, the sound before or after the update timing of the first period is set so that it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp. If it does in this way, it will become possible to produce switching of sound and silence at the update timing of a predetermined production, and it becomes possible to make the update timing of a predetermined production and the start or end timing of a sound production coincide. Thereby, it is possible to suitably execute the sound effect.

  Note that “special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to recognize the sound generated by the sound generating means” means that “the sound generated by the sound generating means is difficult or impossible to identify by the player. May be expressed as “special information”, or “special information in which no sound is generated by the sound generation unit”.

  Further, the “sound generation unit” may be referred to as “sound output unit”. In this case, the “special information” may be expressed as “special information that makes it difficult or impossible to grasp the sound output by the sound output unit”.

  Furthermore, “at least one before and after the predetermined update timing in the first period” may be expressed as “at least one immediately before and after the predetermined update timing in the first period”.

Feature A2. Based on the occurrence of a predetermined effect, predetermined effect means for executing a predetermined effect by a predetermined effect means (liquid crystal display device 65) (function of executing display data setting processing by sub control device 81, display) A function of executing V interrupt processing by the control device 201),
Sound effect means (sub-sub) that executes a sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means by sound generated by a predetermined sound generation means (speaker device 64 including a sound source IC 85, an amplifier 86, and an individual speaker 87) A function of executing sound data setting processing by the control device 81, a function of executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85),
A gaming machine comprising
First update means (function for executing V interrupt processing by the display control device 201) capable of executing update processing of the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means in a first period (about 33.3 msec);
Second update means (function for executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85) capable of executing sound generation by the sound generation means in a second period (10 msec) different from the first period;
With
The sound production means is
Setting means for setting sound information of the sound effect corresponding to the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means (a function for executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81);
Output means for outputting the sound information set by the setting means to the sound generation means (function for executing the processing of step S3008, step S3012, etc. by the sub-control device 81);
With
The sound generation means sequentially generates sounds of the sound effects based on the sound information output by the output means,
The setting means uses, as the sound information, special information (silence data) that makes it difficult or impossible for a player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generation means, by the sound generation means corresponding to the special information. It is possible to set so that the sound is generated at least one before and after a predetermined update timing in the first period.

  In a gaming machine in which the predetermined effect that is updated in the first period is executed together with the sound effect that is generated in the second period, the predetermined effect and the sound effect are executed separately, so the processing is distributed. On the other hand, due to the difference in period, there is a high possibility that there is a difference between the update timing of the predetermined performance and the generation timing of the sound in the sound performance. If such a deviation occurs, not only can you not fully expect the production effect of the predetermined production and sound production, but the deviation will awaken the player and reduce the degree of attention on the contrary Can be. In that respect, in the above-described configuration, the sound before or after the update timing of the first period is set so that it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp. If it does in this way, it will become possible to produce switching of sound and silence at the update timing of a predetermined production, and it becomes possible to make the update timing of a predetermined production and the start or end timing of a sound production coincide.

  In addition, in the above configuration, the sound production means includes setting means for setting sound information, and output means for outputting the sound information set by the setting means to the sound generation means, and the sound generation means is Since the sound generation is sequentially performed based on the sound information output by the output means, the setting means can leave the sound generation to the sound generation means after setting the sound information. The processing is also distributed with respect to the sound generation means. By doing in this way, when a new stage trigger occurs and it is going to set sound information, the setting process based on the previous stage trigger and the setting process based on the new stage trigger may overlap. Can be reduced. In this way, by distributing the processing between the predetermined effect means and the sound effect means, and further distributing the processing between the sound effect means by the setting means and the sound generation means, the sound effect can be achieved as described above. While adding a function such as adjusting the generation timing, it is possible to avoid an increase in processing load and to appropriately execute a sound effect.

  Note that “special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to recognize the sound generated by the sound generating means” means that “the sound generated by the sound generating means is difficult or impossible to identify by the player. May be expressed as “special information”, or “special information in which no sound is generated by the sound generation unit”.

  Further, the “sound generation unit” may be referred to as “sound output unit”. In this case, the “special information” may be expressed as “special information that makes it difficult or impossible to grasp the sound output by the sound output unit”.

  Furthermore, “at least one before and after the predetermined update timing in the first period” may be expressed as “at least one immediately before and immediately after the predetermined update timing in the first period”.

  Feature A3. The setting means generates, as the sound information, normal information (sound data) that allows the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generation means, and generates the sound by the sound generation means corresponding to the normal information. The game machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, wherein the normal information is set such that the normal information is set before or after the special information with the predetermined update timing in between.

  According to the above configuration, the sound generation process based on the special information and the sound generation process based on the normal information are switched at a predetermined update timing. As a result, it is possible to match the predetermined update timing in the predetermined effect with the start or end timing of the sound effect.

  Feature A4. The setting means generates, as the sound information, normal information (sound data) that allows the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generation means, and generates the sound by the sound generation means corresponding to the normal information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A3, wherein the normal information can be set so as to be performed after the special information.

  According to the above configuration, the boundary between the generation of sound for special information that is difficult or impossible to grasp by the player and the generation of sound for normal information that can be grasped by the player is an update of a predetermined effect. Since the normal information is set after the special information at the timing, the player can grasp the sound at the update timing. Therefore, the update timing of the predetermined effect and the start timing of the sound effect can be matched.

  Feature A5. The setting means generates, as the sound information, normal information (sound data) that allows the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generation means, and generates the sound by the sound generation means corresponding to the normal information. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4, wherein the normal information can be set so as to be performed before the special information.

  According to the above configuration, the boundary between the generation of sound for special information that is difficult or impossible to grasp by the player and the generation of sound for normal information that can be grasped by the player is an update of a predetermined effect. Since the normal information is set before the special information at the timing, the player can make it difficult or impossible to grasp the sound at the update timing. Therefore, the update timing of the predetermined effect and the end timing of the sound effect can be matched.

  Feature A6. The setting means performs sound generation by the sound generation means corresponding to the normal information after the specific period for a specific period after a period in which the sound generation means corresponding to the normal information is generated. The special information is set so that the sound is generated by the sound generation unit corresponding to the special information for the specific period, and the sound by the sound generation unit corresponding to the normal information is set after the specific period. The gaming machine according to Feature A5, wherein when the generation of is not performed, the special information is not set for the specific period.

  According to the above configuration, when sound information is set in the order of normal information → special information, if the sound is generated in the order of normal information → special information → normal information, the special information is set. After setting as normal information → special information, if no sound of normal information is generated, special information is not set. In this way, setting data can be reduced.

  Feature A7. One of the features A1 to A6, wherein the first period is a period longer than the second period and having a length different from an integer multiple of the second period. Game machines.

  According to the above configuration, since the first period is not an integral multiple of the second period, a difference is likely to occur in the update timing between the first period and the second period. If the structure of the feature A1 is applied in the production of the cycle having such a relationship, it is possible to suitably eliminate the deviation between the two productions (the predetermined production and the sound production).

  In addition, about the structure whose 2nd period is longer than a 1st period, if the 2nd period is set as the structure of the length different from the integral multiple of a 1st period, there can exist an effect similar to the above. is there.

Feature A8. Comprising display means having a predetermined display screen;
The predetermined effect means is configured to execute the predetermined effect by controlling the display means so as to update a frame image displayed on the predetermined display screen in a first period. The gaming machine according to any one of A1 to A7.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined effect is a display effect, and the frame image is updated in the first period. In general, the update of the frame image in the display effect is performed by setting / updating each pixel constituting the display screen. When an attempt is made to change the update timing of the frame image, the setting / updating of each pixel is performed. It is necessary to change until. In that respect, as described above, since the special information is set before or after the frame image update timing, the sound output start timing and output end timing in the sound production can be matched with the frame image update timing. The start / end timing of both effects can be matched without changing the update timing on the frame image side.

Feature A9. Among the predetermined effects, start frame grasping means for grasping a start frame for starting the sound effect by the sound producing means (processing for grasping a sound data generation frame by the sub-control device 81: function for executing step S3004 and the like) With
The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein the setting means sets the special information based on a grasp result by the start frame grasping means.

  According to the above configuration, the start timing of the sound effect can be matched with the update timing of the start frame by grasping the start frame of the sound effect and setting the special information according to the start frame. It becomes possible.

Feature A10. Means for preliminarily storing the special information in the length of the first cycle unit (sound data table storage area 83b by the sub-control device 81);
The gaming machine according to Feature A8 or Feature A9, wherein the setting means is capable of setting the special information by the length of the first period unit.

  According to the above configuration, the special information is set in units (frame units) corresponding to the update period of the unit frame image. This makes it much easier to adjust the length of the special information in order to match the start / end timing of the sound production with the update timing of the frame image, and simplifies the process for matching the timing. Can be achieved.

  Feature A11. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A10, wherein the setting means is capable of setting the special information with a length shorter than the first period.

  According to the above configuration, the amount of data to be set is reduced, and the degree of freedom of the length of special information to be set is improved. Therefore, in order to eliminate the sound shift, the configuration can cope with various shifts.

Feature A12. Among the predetermined effects, start frame grasping means for grasping a start frame for starting the sound effect by the sound producing means (processing for grasping a sound data generation frame by the sub-control device 81: function for executing step S3004 and the like) When,
Period grasping means for grasping the length of the period from the update timing of the second period before the start frame to the start frame (function to execute the processing of step S3009, step S3010, etc. by the sub-control device 81);
With
Any one of the features A8 to A11, wherein the setting means can set the special information with a length of a period grasped by the period grasping means (for example, about 3.3 msec). The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the above configuration, the length of the special information can be minimized. In this way, the start / end timing of the sound effect and the display effect can be matched while reducing the data amount of the sound information to be set.

Feature A13. Among the predetermined effects, start frame grasping means for grasping a start frame for starting the sound effect by the sound producing means (processing for grasping a sound data generation frame by the sub-control device 81: function for executing step S3004 and the like) When,
Means for preliminarily storing the special information in the length of the first cycle unit (sound data table storage area 83b by the sub-control device 81);
Period grasping means for grasping the length of the period from the update timing of the second period before the start frame to the start frame (function to execute the processing of step S3009, step S3010, etc. by the sub-control device 81);
With
The setting means includes
First means capable of setting the special information in the length of the first period unit;
Second means capable of setting the special information with the length of the period grasped by the period grasping means (for example, about 3.3 msec),
When the grasp result by the start frame grasping means is a result that the start frame is before the predetermined number of frames from the start of the predetermined effect, the special information is set by the first means, and the start frame The game machine according to Feature A4, wherein the special information is set by the second means when the result is that the predetermined number of frames is after the start of the predetermined effect.

  According to the above configuration, when the number of frames up to the start frame is small, the special information is set in the length of each frame, and when the number of frames up to the start frame is large, the length is equivalent to the amount of deviation. Special information is set. By doing so, for example, when the number of frames up to the start frame is small, the display effect and the start of sound generation based on the special information are combined, and it is not necessary to estimate the start timing. The processing load can be reduced, and the amount of data to be set can be reduced when the number of frames up to the start frame is large.

Feature A14. A plurality of the sound generating means;
The setting means includes
The sound information can be set for each of the plurality of sound generation means,
Among the plurality of sound generation means, the sound information set for the first sound generation means is at least before and after the first update timing in the first period when the sound corresponding to the special information is generated. On the other hand,
Among the plurality of sound generating means, the sound information set for the second sound generating means different from the first sound generating means is the sound generation corresponding to the special information in the first period. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, wherein the gaming machine can be performed at least before and after the second update timing different from the update timing of one.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration having a plurality of sound generation means, the timing at which the sound corresponding to the special information is generated differs depending on the sound generation means. In this way, the sound effect is not only made heavy, but also the effect of the feature A1 can be achieved at a plurality of update timings in the predetermined effect.

Feature A15. A plurality of the sound generating means;
The setting means includes
The sound information can be set for each of the plurality of sound generation means,
The sound information set for the first sound generation means among the plurality of sound generation means is configured to generate a sound corresponding to the special information at a predetermined timing,
The player can grasp the sound information generated by the sound generation means for the sound information set for the second sound generation means different from the first sound generation means among the plurality of sound generation means. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A14, wherein a sound corresponding to normal information (sound data) can be generated at the predetermined timing.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration having a plurality of sound generation means, the sound for the normal information is generated by the second sound generation means at a predetermined timing when the sound for the special information is generated by the first sound generation means. Is generated. That is, at a predetermined timing, it is difficult or impossible to grasp the sound generated from the first sound generating means, but it is possible to grasp the sound generated from the second sound generating means. As a result, it is not difficult or impossible to grasp the sound in the predetermined performance at a predetermined timing, but any sound can be grasped. Therefore, in the configuration having a plurality of sound generating means, each sound generation It is possible to realize an effect in which sounds are continuously generated while sounds by means are overlapped with each other.

  Feature A16. As the predetermined effect by the predetermined effect means, the update process by the first update means is performed, whereby an effect from a predetermined first effect to a second effect is executed, and after the execution of the second effect A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A15, wherein a special effect (loop effect, for example, an effect for an attack mode) is set to return to the first effect.

  In the above configuration, a special effect is set as a so-called loop effect that returns to the first effect after the effects are executed from the first effect to the second effect. In a gaming machine having such a special effect, once the special effect is set, it is only necessary to repeatedly execute the special effect. Is overwhelmingly reduced. Then, while performing the special effect, there is a grace period for processing to perform other effects, and it is possible to suitably enhance the effect. On the other hand, in a gaming machine in which such a special effect is set, if there is a difference between the update timing of the special effect and the start / end timing of the sound effect, the difference is cumulative for each loop. May increase. In that respect, as described in the feature A1, special information is set so that such a shift does not occur, so that it is possible to suitably enjoy the effect of the loop effect.

Feature A17. A game progression means for performing a game progression process (a function for executing a normal process by the main control device 101) when a specific event based on a game operation by a player (for example, a game start based on an operation of the start lever 41) occurs. )When,
A first effect means (a function for executing an effect during bonus by the sub-control device 81) capable of executing a predetermined first effect (effect during bonus);
A second effect means (a function for executing an effect in attack mode by the sub-control device 81) capable of executing a second effect (effect in attack mode) different from the first effect;
Means for updating the first effect when the specific event occurs during the execution of the first effect (subtraction processing of the bonus effect counter by the sub-control device 81: the function of executing the process of step S2615);
Based on the fact that the execution time of the second effect has reached a predetermined update period, a means for updating the second effect (a function of executing a process of updating the effect during the attack mode by the sub-control device 81) )When,
When the first effect by the first effect means is performed, the setting means restricts the setting of the special information, while the second effect by the second effect means is performed. , Means for allowing the special information to be set by the setting means (function for executing the process of step S3202 by the sub-control device 81),
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A16, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, the first effect in which the effect is updated based on the game operation (specific event) by the player and the second effect in which the effect is updated based on the passage of time are set. . The game operation by the player is performed at the player's free timing, and the first effect needs to be updated to some degree. In this case, for example, even if the special information is set so that the start timing or the end timing of the sound effect coincides with the update timing of the first effect, the special information is updated by the update that occurs at the above free timing. Setting may be wasted. Therefore, the special information is not set for the first effect, while the special information is set for the second effect so that the special information is set as necessary. Can be avoided.

Feature A18. As the predetermined effect means, a first predetermined effect means capable of executing a first predetermined effect (display effect) (a function of executing display data setting processing by the sub-control device 81, a function of executing V interrupt processing by the display control device 201) ) And second predetermined effect means (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) capable of executing a second predetermined effect (rotation effect of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R) different from the first predetermined effect. And
As the first update means, a first specific update means (V interrupt by the display control device 201) capable of executing the update process of the first predetermined effect by the first predetermined effect means at a first specific period (about 33.3 msec). And a second specific update means capable of executing the second predetermined effect update process by the second predetermined effect means at a second specific period (1.49 msec) different from the first specific period. (Function for executing timer interrupt processing by the main controller 101);
A gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, comprising:

  In game machines, there are a wide variety of sound effects. For example, a display effect and a sound effect are performed as a set as a first predetermined effect, and an operation effect and a sound effect using a movable accessory are performed as a set as a second predetermined effect. It is common to do. In such a configuration, if the update cycle of the first predetermined effect is different from the update cycle of the second predetermined effect, the design change is performed, for example, by matching the update cycle of one effect with the update cycle of the sound effect. Even so, there is a possibility that deviation from the sound effect may occur due to the update cycle of the other effect. In that respect, if the configuration of the feature A1 is applied to such a configuration, it becomes possible to avoid the occurrence of deviation using special information in relation to a wide variety of effects, and a major design change can be made. The sound effect can be suitably realized without the necessity.

Feature A19. Operation means (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) for performing a predetermined operation;
Drive means (function to execute reel control processing by the main control device 101) for performing the predetermined operation by controlling the operation of the operation means at a predetermined drive cycle;
With
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A18, wherein the predetermined update timing is generated in the predetermined driving cycle by the driving unit.

  According to the above configuration, the predetermined effect is an effect caused by the operation of the operation means, and the sound effect is performed in association with the operation of the operation means. Such movement of the movement means looks and is flashy and easily attracts the attention of the player, but if there is a gap between the movement and the sound production, the player is so flashy that the movement is flashy. There is a high probability that you will be awakened. Therefore, by setting special information as sound information as feature A1, the start / end timing of the sound effect can be matched with the update timing of the effect by the operation of the operation means, so that it can be awakened by the shift. It is possible to reduce the performance and to fully exhibit the effect of the operation means.

Feature A20. A plurality of rotating bodies (reel 32L, 32M, 32R) each having a plurality of types of patterns attached in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows a part of the pattern to be visually recognized for each of the circulating bodies;
Start operation means (start lever 41) for starting the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when operated,
A lottery means (a function for executing a lottery process by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to give a privilege to the player based on the operation of the start operation means;
Stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) that are provided for each of the rotating bodies and stop the rotation of the rotating bodies corresponding to the operation.
Drive control means (reel by main controller 101) that starts the circulation of each of the circulating bodies when the start operation means is operated, and stops the rotation of the circulating bodies corresponding to the operation of the stop operation means. Control processing)
When a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result, and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the pattern can be visually recognized via the display unit, Privilege granting means for granting a privilege corresponding to the predetermined result (function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising
The operating means is each of the circulating bodies,
The drive means is the drive control means;
The predetermined update timing is such that a specific pattern (No. 16 “red 7” symbol) of a specific rotating body (left reel 32L) among the rotating bodies can be visually recognized via the display unit by the drive control means. The gaming machine according to Feature A19, wherein the timing is controlled so as to be arranged at a specific position.

  According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, lottery is performed by the lottery means and the circulation of the circulating body is started, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circulating body is stopped and stopped. In so-called slot machines where benefits are granted by privilege grant means if the outcome corresponds to the lottery result, there is a case where a sound production corresponding to the circulation of the circuit body is performed. It occurs at the timing when the specific pattern of the orbiting body is arranged at a specific position. In this case, the orbiting body continuously circulates until the stop operation means is operated, and the sound effect is generated every time the specific pattern reaches the specific position. In such a configuration, there is a difference between the generation timing of the sound effect and the timing at which the specific pattern reaches the specific position. The shift increases cumulatively for each rotation of the circuit body.

  In particular, for example, in a configuration in which the sound production is performed for assisting the pressing of a specific pattern, a player accustomed to the game may aim for the specific pattern without requiring such a pressing assist. Therefore, it is possible to perform an operation aiming at a specific pattern with a small number of laps. On the other hand, for players who are unfamiliar with the game, it is thought that they are aiming for a specific pattern by relying on sound production as an auxiliary aid, but because of the lack of confidence in the operation, etc. If it is taken into consideration, it is considered that the number of circulations of the orbiting body increases accordingly, and the above deviation can be cumulatively increased. Then, although it is a sound production for a player who needs assistance, the assistance may be hindered.

  Therefore, as in the above configuration, the sound generation for the special information as the sound information is performed before or after the timing at which the specific pattern reaches the specific position. It is possible to prevent a deviation from the arrival timing of the specific pattern.

Feature A21. Volume setting means (first Vol switch 75, second Vol switch 76) capable of setting the volume of the sound effect by the sound effect means in a plurality of stages,
The setting means can set normal information (sound data) that allows the player to grasp the sound generated by the sound generation means,
The sound generation means includes
When the first volume (sound setting 1) is set by the volume setting means, the sound is generated so that the sound corresponding to the normal information becomes the first volume,
When a second volume (sound setting 9) that is larger than the first volume is set by the volume setting means, the sound is generated so that the sound corresponding to the normal information becomes the second volume. While
In both cases where the first volume is set by the volume setting means and the second volume is set by the volume setting means, it is difficult for the player to grasp the sound regarding the special information or The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A17, wherein the sound is generated so that it cannot be grasped.

  According to the above configuration, by changing the set volume by the volume setting means, the volume is changed for the sound for which the normal information is set, but the sound for which the special information is set is irrespective of the set volume. The player becomes difficult or impossible to grasp. In this way, by setting special information, the start / end timing of the sound effect is matched with the update timing of the predetermined effect, but the event that they are shifted due to the set sound volume is avoided. Can do.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1. Sound reproduction means (sound source IC 85, amplifier 86, individual speaker 87) capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on the predetermined sound information generated by the sound information generation means (function for executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81). A gaming machine including a speaker device 64) including:
The sound information generating means
First sound information generating means for generating first sound information (for example, sound data from t11 to t12 in FIG. 72 (c)) (for example, sound data for the first sound source IC 85a by the sub-control device 81 is set. Processing function), and
Second sound information (for example, silence data from t11 to t12 in FIG. 72 (d)) having the same playback period as the first sound information, and third sound information following the second sound information (for example, FIG. 72 ( second sound information generating means (for example, a function for executing sound data setting for the second sound source IC 85b by the sub-control device 81) for generating sound data from t12 to t13 in d);
With
According to the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the second sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound,
A gaming machine characterized in that a series of sounds can be reproduced by reproduction of sound based on the first sound information and reproduction of sound based on the third sound information by the sound reproduction means.

  According to the above configuration, the first sound information generating means is used to reproduce a series of sounds based on the first sound information and the third sound information generated by the first sound information generating means and the second sound information generating means. It is not necessary to synchronize the reproduction timing of the sound information generated in the second sound information generation means with the reproduction timing of the sound information generated by the second sound information generation means, and a series of a plurality of sound information can be obtained with a simple configuration. It is possible to produce a sound. For example, in order to synchronize the reproduction timing of the sound information generated by the both sound information generation means, the second sound information generation is performed in consideration of the timing when the reproduction of the first sound information generated by the first sound information generation means ends. In the case of starting the reproduction of the third sound information generated by the means, it is necessary to use a predetermined timer or the like. Depending on the update timing of the predetermined timer, the third sound information may be Playback may not be started. Then, in such a configuration, if the generation of the third sound information by the second sound information generation means is to be forced after the generation of the first sound information by the first sound information generation means, the reproduction of the first sound information is terminated. Even if there is a difference between the timing, the third sound information, and the reproduction start timing, an attempt is made to perform a superimposed sound effect by a plurality of sound information generating means such as the first sound information generating means and the second sound information generating means. There is a possibility that a sufficient production effect cannot be obtained due to the deviation, or that the production effect is reduced. In that respect, with the configuration described above, it is not necessary to use a timer, and sound information can be taken over at a timing that does not depend on the timer update timing. Can be obtained.

Feature B2. The fourth sound information (for example, silence data from t11 to t13 in FIG. 72 (f)) having the same reproduction period as the total of the second sound information and the third sound information, and the fourth sound information are followed by the second sound information. Third sound information generating means (for example, sound data for the fourth sound source IC 85d by the sub-control device 81) for generating five sound information (for example, sound data from t13 to t14 in FIG. 72 (f)) is set. Function to execute processing)
According to the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the fourth sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound,
A series of sounds can be reproduced by reproducing the sound based on the first sound information, reproducing the sound based on the third sound information, and reproducing the sound based on the fifth sound information by the sound reproducing means. The gaming machine according to Feature B1.

  According to the above configuration, the first sound information generation unit and the second sound information generation unit perform the reproduction of a series of sounds based on the fifth sound information in addition to the first sound information and the third sound information. It is not necessary to synchronize the generation of sound information, and it is not necessary to synchronize the generation of sound information by the third sound information generating means. That is, the configuration that can realize a series of superimposed sound effects by the first sound information generation unit and the second sound information generation unit of the feature B1 is the combination of the first sound information generation unit and the second sound information generation unit. The configuration is not limited to a set, and the third sound information generating means, the fourth sound information generating means, and so on can be further expanded to a superimposed sound effect by a plurality of sound information generating means. It is shown that. As described above, when the number of sound information generating means increases, the structure for synchronizing the sound information generating means may be complicated by the increase in the number of sound information generating means. If the configuration of B2 is used, even if the number of sound information generating means is increased, it is possible to enjoy only the merit of providing a superimposed sound effect, and the configuration is not complicated. Therefore, it is possible to suitably realize the sound effect.

Feature B3. The first sound information generating means continues the first sound information with sixth sound information (for example, silence data from t12 to t13 in FIG. 72C) having the same reproduction period as the second sound information. Can be generated,
The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2, wherein it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound by reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the sixth sound information.

  According to the above configuration, the reproduction period of the first sound information and the sixth sound information generated by the first sound information generation means is the reproduction period of the second sound information and the third sound information generated by the second sound information generation means. And the same length. That is, in the configuration in which sound information is generated by a plurality of sound information generating means, the length of the reproduction period of each sound information is uniform. As a result, when the sound information generation processing is distributed by the plurality of sound information generation means, the processing load of each sound information generation means can be made uniform. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a processing drop or the like due to partial processing.

Feature B4. The first sound information generating means continues the first sound information with sixth sound information (for example, silence data from t12 to t13 in FIG. 72C) having the same reproduction period as the second sound information. Furthermore, it is possible to generate seventh sound information (for example, sound data from t13 to t14 in FIG. 72 (c)) following the six sound information.
According to the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the sixth sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound,
A series of sounds can be reproduced by the sound reproduction based on the first sound information, the sound reproduction based on the third sound information, and the sound reproduction based on the seventh sound information by the sound reproduction means. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3.

  According to the above configuration, the sound reproduction based on the first sound information by the first sound information generating means, the sound reproduction based on the third sound information by the second sound information generating means, and the seventh sound by the first sound information generating means. A series of sound effects such as sound reproduction based on information is performed. In this way, even after sound information that makes it difficult or impossible to grasp a sound is set for the player, sound reproduction based on sound information that can be grasped is performed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively use each sound information generating means.

  Feature B5. The game machine according to any one of features B1 to B4, wherein the sound reproduction means can start reproduction of sound information by the sound information generation means simultaneously or substantially simultaneously.

  According to the above configuration, for example, in the feature B1, the sound reproduction based on the first sound information by the first sound information generation unit and the sound reproduction based on the second sound information by the second sound information generation unit are performed simultaneously or It starts almost at the same time. The first sound information and the second sound information are set to have the same reproduction period. By simultaneously starting reproduction as described above, the end timing of the first sound information and the end timing of the second sound information are set. Therefore, it is possible to make the playback end timing of the first sound information by the first sound information generating means and the playback start timing of the third sound information by the second sound information generating means uninterrupted. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the continuity of a series of sound effects by each sound information generating means only by aligning the length of each sound information.

  Note that “being able to start at the same time or almost at the same time” not only means when it is completely simultaneous, but also “plays back each piece of sound information so that the player has a gap that is difficult or impossible to grasp. Can be started ".

Feature B6. The sound reproduction means is provided corresponding to each of the sound information generation means,
Each of the sound reproduction means performs generation of sound information generated by the corresponding sound information generation means, respectively, and the gaming machine according to the feature B5,

  The above configuration is a specific configuration of the feature B5. With such a configuration, the effect of the feature B5 can be more effectively exhibited.

  Feature B7. The game machine according to Feature B6, wherein the sound reproducing means is installed such that at least one of an output direction and an installation position of a sound to be reproduced is different.

  According to the above configuration, if the output direction and the installation position are different even with the same sound, the sound grasped by the player will be different, and a plurality of sound information may be generated by the sound information generating means, or a plurality of sound reproducing means Therefore, it is possible to increase the significance of performing superimposed sound reproduction.

Feature B8. Sound source information storage means (sound source data storage area 83e) for storing sound source information (sound source data) reproduced by the sound reproduction means;
Sound information storage means (data output area 84a) for storing the sound information generated by the sound information generation means;
With
The sound reproducing means includes
Based on the sound information stored in the sound information storage means, an acquisition means for acquiring the sound source information from the sound source information storage means (function for executing the process of step S3104 by the sound source IC 85);
Reproducing means for reproducing the sound source information obtained by the obtaining means (function for executing the processing of step S3107 by the sound source IC 85);
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B7, comprising:

  According to the above configuration, when sound is reproduced by the sound reproducing unit based on the sound information generated by the sound information generating unit, the sound information is reproduced by the data generated by the sound information generating unit and the sound reproducing unit. It will play the role of linking data to be processed. That is, the sound reproduction means obtains sound source information based on the sound information generated by the sound information generation means, and reproduces the sound source information, thereby producing a sound effect. In this way, by using the sound information, for example, it is possible to significantly reduce the amount of data exchanged compared to a configuration in which sound source information is generated each time.

Feature B9. Specific effect execution means (sub-control) that can execute a specific effect including a sound effect reproduced by the sound reproduction means and a predetermined effect (display effect) different from the sound effect based on a predetermined effect opportunity A function to execute the effect data setting process by the device 81),
The specific production execution unit is configured to start the predetermined production at the same timing or substantially the same timing as the start timing of the sound production by the sound reproduction unit, according to any one of the features B1 to B8, Gaming machine.

  According to the above configuration, in the configuration in which the sound effect is started simultaneously or substantially simultaneously with the predetermined effect, the sound effect is configured such that superimposed sound information is generated by a plurality of sound information generating means, and each sound is generated. It becomes possible to easily synchronize the reproduction start timing of the sound based on the sound information generated by the information generation means with the start timing of each predetermined effect. In this way, by applying the configuration that can easily synchronize the sound effect as in the feature B1 to the synchronization with the other effect, not only the sound effect but also the other effect. In combination with the above, it is possible to achieve a production having a high production effect with a simple configuration.

Feature B10. The predetermined effect is a display effect in which a display frame is updated at a predetermined period,
Each of the sound information has a playback length that is an integral multiple of the predetermined period, which is an update period of the display frame, and the game machine according to Feature B9.

  According to the above configuration, the sound reproduction end timing based on the first sound information (second sound information), that is, the sound reproduction start timing based on the third sound information matches the display frame update timing. In this way, by setting the playback length of the sound information in relation to the display frame update cycle, it is possible to easily match the update timing of the display effect with the switching timing of the sound information that is the sound playback base. It becomes possible, and it becomes possible to avoid the difference between the display and the sound.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1. A gaming machine comprising predetermined effect execution means (a function for executing effect data setting processing by the sub-control device 81) for executing a predetermined effect at a predetermined timing based on the occurrence of a predetermined effect.
The predetermined effect execution means includes
Sound production execution means (sound production execution means (speaker device 64 including a sound source IC 85, an amplifier 86, and an individual speaker 87) that performs sound production control based on predetermined sound information can execute a sound production as the predetermined production ( A function of executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81),
The sound production execution means
Generation control update means (function for executing sound generation processing by the sound source IC 85) for updating the generation control by the sound generation means at a predetermined specific period (10 msec period);
As the sound information, special information that makes it difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound when the sound generation means performs the sound generation control, and the sound generation control based on the special information is the predetermined timing. And a first control unit (steps S3007, S3008, S3011, and S311, performed by the sub-control device 81) that controls the sound generation unit so as to be performed over a specific period corresponding to the amount of deviation between the update timing of the specific cycle and the step A function of executing processing such as S3012);
Subsequent to sound generation control based on the special information, second control means (step by the sub-control device 81) that controls the sound generation means so that sound generation control based on sound information corresponding to the predetermined effect is performed. S3004, step S3008, step S3012, etc.)
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  In the configuration in which the predetermined effect is performed at a predetermined timing based on the occurrence of the effect, in the above configuration, the sound effect by the sound generation control by the sound generation unit is performed as the predetermined effect. The sound generation control by the sound generation means is executed in a specific cycle. Depending on the length of the specific cycle and the execution timing of the predetermined effect, the update timing of the specific cycle, that is, the update timing of the sound generation control, and the execution of the predetermined effect There may be a difference between the timing, that is, the timing at which the sound effect should be executed. In that respect, in the configuration described above, sound generation control is performed for special information that is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp for a specific period corresponding to the amount of deviation, and then corresponds to a predetermined effect. Sound generation control based on the sound information is performed. Therefore, even if there is a gap between the update timing of the sound generation control as described above and the timing at which the sound effect should be executed, the sound generation control is started from the update timing at which the gap remains generated. By doing so, it becomes possible to start the sound production from a predetermined timing. Thus, it is possible to suitably execute the sound effect without requiring a complicated configuration change such as changing the update cycle in order to eliminate the above-described deviation.

Feature C2. Grasping means for grasping an amount of deviation between the predetermined timing and the update timing of the specific period based on the production trigger (processing of steps S3005, S3007, S3009 to S3011, etc. by the sub-control device 81) Function to execute)
The gaming machine according to claim C1, wherein the first control unit controls the sound generation unit such that sound generation control based on the special information is performed based on a grasp result by the grasping unit.

  According to the above configuration, the amount of deviation between the update timing of the sound generation control and the timing at which the sound effect should be executed is appropriately grasped based on the occurrence of the effect. By doing in this way, it becomes the structure which can respond to diversification of the amount of deviation, and it becomes possible to perform a sound production more suitably.

  Feature C3. The game machine according to Feature C2, wherein the grasping means grasps the deviation amount so that the specific period is shorter than the length of the specific period.

  According to the above configuration, the amount of deviation can be reduced. Therefore, the period during which the sound generation control based on the special information is performed can be shortened, and the data amount of the sound information to be set can be reduced.

  Feature C4. The game machine according to Feature C3, wherein the grasping means grasps an amount of deviation between the update timing immediately before the predetermined timing among the update timings of the specific period and the predetermined timing.

  According to the above configuration, the amount of deviation can be minimized. Therefore, the length of the specific period in which the sound generation control based on the special information is performed becomes the shortest, and the data amount of the sound information to be set can be reduced.

Feature C5. A first sound generating means and a second sound generating means as the sound generating means;
As the predetermined timing for executing the predetermined effect when the effect triggers, a first predetermined timing for executing a first sound effect by a sound generated and controlled by the first sound generating means, and the second sound generation The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C4, characterized in that the timing is set to be different from a second predetermined timing for executing the second sound effect by the sound generated and controlled by the means.

  According to the above-described configuration, the predetermined timing at which the sound production using the sound that is generated and controlled by each sound generating unit is different. In such a configuration, by applying the configuration of the feature C1, the start timing of the control is separately adjusted in order to control the productions that are started at different timings even if the production is based on the same production opportunity. Therefore, each sound effect can be suitably executed without complicating the processing configuration.

Feature C6. Setting means (function for executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81) for setting the sound information used for sound generation control by the first control means and the second control means;
The setting means sets the sound information used for sound generation control by the first control means and the sound information setting used for sound generation control by the second control means to the first predetermined value. The gaming machine according to Feature C5, wherein the gaming machine is performed at a timing based on the performance trigger regardless of the timing and the second predetermined timing.

  According to the above configuration, the setting of the sound information for the first sound generation unit and the second sound generation unit is performed at the timing based on the production trigger regardless of the execution timing of the first sound production and the second sound production. . In this way, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of waiting without sound information being set indefinitely depending on the execution timing of the sound effect.

Feature C7. The first control means includes
The sound generation control based on the special information by the first sound generation means is performed over a specific period corresponding to the amount of deviation between the first predetermined timing and the update timing of the specific period of the first sound generation means. Control to be done,
The sound generation control based on the special information by the second sound generation unit is performed over a specific period corresponding to a deviation amount between the second predetermined timing and the update timing of the specific period of the second sound generation unit. The gaming machine according to Feature C5 or Feature C6, which is controlled to be performed.

  According to the above configuration, even if the execution timing of each sound effect is shifted from the specific cycle, sound generation control based on special information is performed over a specific period corresponding to each shift amount. The sound production can be started at the target execution timing while the deviation from the update timing is generated.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. Sound reproduction means (sound source IC 85, amplifier 86, individual speaker 87) capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on the predetermined sound information generated by the sound information generation means (function for executing sound data setting processing by the sub-control device 81). A gaming machine including a speaker device 64) including:
A plurality of sound reproduction means;
The sound information generating means is a first reproduction period (for example, a sound is reproduced by a first sound reproducing means (for example, a first sound source IC 85a, a first amplifier 86a, a first speaker 87a) among the plurality of sound reproducing means. The period from t11 to t14 in FIG. 72 (c) and the second sound reproducing means (for example, the second sound source IC 85b, the second amplifier 86b, and the second speaker 87b) different from the first sound reproducing means. The overlapping reproduction period (for example, the period from t11 to t14 in FIGS. 72 (c) and 72 (d)) overlapped with the second reproduction period to be reproduced (for example, the period from t11 to t14 in FIG. 72 (d)). In the specific period (for example, t1 in FIG. 72 (c)), the special sound that is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp is reproduced for the sound reproduced by at least one of the sound reproducing means. Period t13 from the period of t11 from t12 in FIG. 72 (d), as the period from t13 t14) is generated, the gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to perform generation of the sound information.

  According to the above configuration, the player grasps the sound reproduced by at least one of the sound reproducing means in a configuration that realizes a superimposed sound effect by overlapping the sound reproduction periods of the plurality of sound reproducing means. Since a specific period that is difficult or impossible to grasp occurs, it is possible to provide a case where sounds overlap and a case where sounds do not overlap without turning on / off the reproduction of each sound. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to adjust the overlap of the production of sound step by step with a simple configuration. Therefore, the sound effect can be suitably executed.

  Feature D2. In the sound information generation means, the special sound is reproduced by the first sound reproduction means during the specific period, while a normal sound that can be grasped by the player is reproduced by the second sound reproduction means. The generation of the sound information is performed so that there occurs a specific period and a second specific period in which the normal sound is reproduced by the first sound reproducing unit and the special sound is reproduced by the second sound reproducing unit. The gaming machine according to Feature D1, wherein the gaming machine can perform the following.

  According to the above configuration, in realizing the superimposed sound effect by the both sound reproducing means, it is possible to cause a period in which the sound effect by only one of the sound reproducing means is performed. In addition, such a configuration can be realized by continuous reproduction of normal sound and specific sound without turning on / off sound reproduction, and the production effect can be obtained more suitably without increasing the processing load. Is possible.

  Feature D3. The sound information generating means generates the sound information so that the second specific period occurs following the first specific period, or the first specific period occurs following the second specific period. The gaming machine according to Feature D2, wherein the gaming machine is capable of.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to realize a configuration in which the on / off control timings in both sound reproducing means are normally overlapped without performing such on / off control. That is, when the second specific period is to be generated following the first specific period, normally, at the boundary, the first sound reproducing means is turned on and the second sound reproducing means is turned off. There is a need to do. In addition, when the first specific period is generated following the second specific period, normally, at the boundary, the first sound reproducing means is turned off and the first sound reproducing means is turned on. There is a need to do. If the timing of these on / off controls is shifted, a period in which both sounds cannot be heard may occur. In that respect, in the above-described configuration, both specific periods are switched by continuous reproduction of the special sound and the normal sound regardless of such on / off control, so that there is no inconvenience due to a shift in control timing or the like. Thus, it is possible to achieve an effect by generating both specific periods.

  Feature D4. Since the sound information is generated so that the specific period is generated by the sound information generation means, the end timing of the first reproduction period and the end timing of the second reproduction period overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3.

  According to the above configuration, the sound reproduction by the both sound reproducing means ends simultaneously. By doing so, for example, when reproducing a sound of a so-called loop effect, there is an event that there is a sound reproducing means that has already finished sound reproduction and a sound reproducing means that has not been finished. Does not occur. Thereby, it is not necessary to change the control depending on whether or not the reproduction of these sounds is completed, and it is possible to achieve uniform control and simplify the processing configuration. Moreover, in order to achieve the same end timing depending on the specific period during which the special sound is played back, the above effects can be achieved without reconsidering the harmony of the production sound, such as considering the overlap of normal sounds. It becomes possible.

  Note that “the end timing of the first playback period and the end timing of the second playback period overlap” means “the end timing of the first playback period and the end timing of the second playback period”. It may be expressed as “the same or substantially the same timing”. In this case, “the same or substantially the same timing” may be expressed as “the same timing to the extent that the player cannot grasp the difference in timing or it is difficult to grasp”.

  Feature D5. A length of a first specific period in which the first sound reproduction unit reproduces the special sound by the sound information generation unit and a second specific period in which the second sound reproduction unit reproduces the special sound is The game machine according to Feature D4, wherein the sound information is generated differently, so that the end timing of the first playback period overlaps with the end timing of the second playback period.

  According to the above configuration, the sound information for the special sounds having different reproduction lengths is set, so that the sound reproduction by the both sound reproducing means is finished at the same time. By doing in this way, even if the reproduction period of the normal sound by both sound reproduction means is different, the effect of the feature D4 can be achieved.

  Feature D6. As the sound effect performed by the sound reproduction means, after the reproduction of the sound during the first reproduction period by the first sound reproduction means and the reproduction of the sound during the second reproduction period by the second sound reproduction means are completed, The specific sound effect (loop effect) for starting the reproduction of the sound during the first reproduction period by the first sound reproduction means and the reproduction of the sound during the second reproduction period by the second sound reproduction means is set. A gaming machine according to Feature D4 or Feature D5, characterized by

  According to the above configuration, in the so-called loop production as the specific sound production, when the sound reproduction by each sound reproduction means is resumed, the reproduction of any sound ends at the same timing. There is no need to expect the end of sound reproduction by the sound reproducing means. That is, for any of the sound reproduction means, when the reproduction of the sound of itself is finished, it is only necessary to resume the reproduction of the sound, and a configuration for asking the trend of the other sound reproduction means becomes unnecessary. Therefore, a loop effect can be realized with a simple configuration.

  Feature D7. Since the sound information is generated so that the specific period is generated by the sound information generation means, the start timing of the first reproduction period and the start timing of the second reproduction period overlap. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6.

  According to the above configuration, sound reproduction by both sound reproducing means starts simultaneously. In this way, in realizing the superimposed sound production by the both sound reproduction means based on the production opportunity, the reproduction start timing of the sound reproduction means on the side that has not started reproduction is estimated after the production opportunity. There is no need. Therefore, it is possible to realize a superimposed sound effect with a simple configuration. Moreover, in order to make the same start timing depending on the specific period during which sound reproduction based on the special information is performed, the above-mentioned sound harmony in production, such as considering the overlap of normal sounds, is taken into consideration. An effect can be produced.

  Note that “the start timing of the first playback period and the start timing of the second playback period overlap” means “the start timing of the first playback period and the start timing of the second playback period”. It may be expressed as “the same or substantially the same timing”. In this case, “the same or substantially the same timing” may be expressed as “the same timing to the extent that the player cannot grasp the difference in timing or it is difficult to grasp”.

  Feature D8. The sound information generating means generates the sound information so as to generate the specific period, so that the first reproduction period and the second reproduction period have the same length. A gaming machine according to any one of D7.

  According to the above configuration, since the sound reproduction period by the first sound reproduction means and the sound reproduction period by the second sound reproduction means have the same length, a superimposed sound effect by a plurality of sound reproduction means is realized. In doing so, the processing load can be evenly distributed. Thereby, it is possible to avoid an increase in local processing load. In addition, in order to make the same reproduction period depending on the specific period during which the special sound is reproduced, the above effects can be achieved without reconsidering the harmony of the production sound, such as considering the overlap of normal sounds. It becomes possible.

  Feature D9. The sound information generating means is configured such that the overlap period becomes the specific period, the start timing of the second playback period occurs after the start timing of the first playback period, and further after the end timing of the first playback period. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D3, wherein the predetermined sound information can be set so that an end timing of the second reproduction period occurs.

  According to the above configuration, the first reproduction period and the second reproduction period have an overlapping period that overlaps each other, but are set such that a shift occurs between the periods. In the overlap period, one sound becomes a special sound and the player cannot grasp it. By doing in this way, it becomes possible to produce a continuous sound effect by a plurality of sound reproduction means such as sound generation by the first sound reproduction means and sound generation by the second sound reproduction means. .

  The technical ideas shown in the configurations of the other features A to D can be individually applied to the configurations of the features A to D described in detail above. It is also possible to apply the technical ideas in combination. When combining and applying each technical idea, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

  A basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-described features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Slot machine, 32 ... Reel, 41 ... Start lever, 42-44 ... Stop switch, 64 ... Speaker apparatus, 65 ... Liquid crystal display device, 81 ... Display control apparatus, 82 ... CPU, 85 ... Sound source IC, 86 ... Amplifier 87, individual speakers, 101, main control device, 102, CPU, 201, display control device, 202, CPU.

Claims (4)

A gaming machine comprising sound reproduction means capable of reproducing a predetermined sound based on the predetermined sound information generated by the sound information generation means,
The sound information generating means
First sound information generating means for generating first sound information;
Second sound information generating means for generating second sound information having the same playback period as the first sound information and third sound information following the second sound information;
With
According to the reproduction by the sound reproduction means based on the second sound information, it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound,
A gaming machine characterized in that a series of sounds can be reproduced by reproduction of sound based on the first sound information and reproduction of sound based on the third sound information by the sound reproduction means. The first sound information generating means can generate sixth sound information having the same reproduction period as the second sound information, following the first sound information,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein it is difficult or impossible for the player to grasp the sound by the reproduction by the sound reproducing means based on the sixth sound information.   The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the sound reproduction means can start reproduction of sound information by the sound information generation means simultaneously or substantially simultaneously. Sound source information storage means for storing sound source information reproduced by the sound reproduction means;
Sound information storage means for storing the sound information generated by the sound information generation means;
With
The sound reproducing means includes
Obtaining means for obtaining the sound source information from the sound source information storage means based on the sound information stored in the sound information storage means;
Reproduction means for reproducing the sound source information acquired by the acquisition means;
A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, further comprising:

Images